ADTRAN Quad T1 IMA Specifications


Add to my manuals
236 Pages

advertisement

ADTRAN Quad T1 IMA Specifications | Manualzz

1

3

2

T1/ 4

®

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA

48-Port DSLAM with Modem

Installation and Maintenance Practice

Document Number: 61179641AL1-5C

CLEI Number: VAMDA00A_ _

September 2007

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Front Matter

Trademarks

Any brand names and product names included in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders.

To the Holder of the Document

The contents of this document are current as of the date of publication. ADTRAN ® reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice.

In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special, incidental, or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this document.

ii

®

901 Explorer Boulevard

P.O. Box 140000

Huntsville, AL 35814-4000

(256) 963-8000

©2007 ADTRAN, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

61179641AL1-5C

Revision History

Revision

A

B

C

Date

October 2004

Description

Initial release

November 2005 Update to new format. Software version B02.

September

2007

This is the third release of this document. This version updates the software to version B03.06.01

Conventions

The following typographical conventions are used in this document:

This font indicates a cross-reference link.

This font indicates screen menus, fields, and parameters.

T HIS FONT

indicates keyboard keys ( E NTER

, E SC

, A LT

). Keys that are to be pressed simultaneously are shown with a plus sign ( A LT + X indicates that the A LT key and

X key should be pressed at the same time ).

This font indicates references to other documentation and is also used for emphasis.

This font indicates on-screen messages and prompts.

This font

indicates text to be typed exactly as shown.

This font indicates silkscreen labels or other system label items.

This font is used for strong emphasis.

NOTE

Notes inform the user of additional, but essential, information or features.

CAUTION

Cautions inform the user of potential damage, malfunction, or disruption to equipment, software, or environment.

WARNING

Warnings inform the user of potential bodily pain, injury, or death.

61179641AL1-5C iii

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Training

ADTRAN offers training courses on our products. These courses include overviews on product features and functions while covering applications of ADTRAN product lines. ADTRAN provides a variety of training options, including customized training and courses taught at our facilities or at customer sites.

For inquiries concerning training, contact ADTRAN:

Training Phone: 800-615-1176, ext. 6996

Training Fax: 256-963-6217

Training Email: [email protected]

iv 61179641AL1-5C

Contents

Section 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Section 2

Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Section 3

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Shipping Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Installation Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Installation Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Mounting the Total Access 1248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Flush-mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Mid-mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Fans/Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Network Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

ADSL2+ Plus POTS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

POTS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

ADSL2+ Plus POTS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

POTS Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Customer Connections (ADSL+POTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Total Access 1200F Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Quick Turn-up Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

61179641AL1-5C v

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Section 4

Provisioning Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Section 5

User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

System Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Craft Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Inband Management Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Logging on to the Total Access 1248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Menu Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

ATM Circuit Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

PVC/PVP Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Create a New PVC/PVP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Delete an Existing PVC/PVP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

OAM Loopback Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Current ATM PVC Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

ATM Quick Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Restore ATM Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

ATM Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

ATM Port Cell Count Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Clear All PM for All Ports Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

ATM OAM Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

System Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Password Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Password Control Levels Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Allow SNMP Security Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Set Menus Idle Logout Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Restore Default Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

vi 61179641AL1-5C

Contents

Test IP Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

Time/Date Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

Current Baud Rate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

SNMP/TL1 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

SNMP Contact Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72

SNMP Community Names Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

SNMP Trap Hosts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Code Download Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Y-Modem Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

TFTP Download Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Restore Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Reset System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Self Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

External Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

External Alarm Severity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Expansion Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Modem Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

Caller ID Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Network Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

T1 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

T1 Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

T1 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

T1 PM Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

T1 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

Restore T1 Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

E1 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

E1 Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

E1 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107

E1 PM Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109

E1 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

Restore E1 Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

IMA Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

IMA Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

IMA Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115

IMA Facility Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116

IMA All Facilities Provisioning Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117

Operation Mode for Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118

IMA Group Provisioning Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119

IMA Shortcut Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121

IMA Scrambler Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122

Restore IMA Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123

Status/Failure Monitoring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124

IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125

IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127

IMA Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131

IMA Performance Monitoring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132

IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133

IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135

T1/E1 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137

DSL Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138

61179641AL1-5C vii

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

DSL Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139

ADSL Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140

Alarm Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144

Port Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147

Service State for ADSL Card Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149

Service State for Port: # Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149

Service Mode for Port: # Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150

Hamband Mask for Port: # Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150

Cabinet Mode for Port: # Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151

Link Down Alarm for Port: # Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152

ADSL Restore Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153

DSP Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154

Reset DSP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156

ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157

Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159

ADSL Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161

ADSL Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162

ATU-R Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163

Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164

Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166

ADSL DELT Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169

System Alarm Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171

System Event Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172

Contact Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174

TL1 Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175

Section 6

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Fan Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Fan Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

SNMP/TFTP and TL1 Configuration Storage and Retrieval. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

SNMP / TFTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

TL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Section 7

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Appendix A

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Warranty and Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

ADTRAN Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

ADTRAN Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

ADTRAN Repair/CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Repair and Return Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

viii 61179641AL1-5C

Figures

Figures

Figure 1-1.

Total Access 1248 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Figure 1-2.

Total Access 1248 Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Figure 2-1.

Total Access 1248 Operational Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Figure 2-2.

Expansion Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Figure 3-1.

Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-2.

Flush-mount Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Figure 3-3.

Mid-mount Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Figure 3-4.

Total Access 1248 Ground Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-5.

Four-point Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Figure 3-6.

Total Access 1248 Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Figure 3-7.

Total Access 1248 Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Figure 3-8.

Total Access 1248 Alarm Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-9.

Total Access 1248 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Figure 3-10. Total Access 1248 POTS and ADSL+POTS Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Figure 3-11. Total Access 1100 Series DSLAM Craft Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Figure 3-12. Login Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Figure 3-13. Total Access 1248 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Figure 3-14. Network Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Figure 3-15. T1 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Figure 3-16. T1 Provisioning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Figure 3-17. Test IP Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Figure 5-1.

Craft Port Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Figure 5-2.

Login Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Figure 5-3.

Total Access 1248 Main Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Figure 5-4.

System Management Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Figure 5-5.

Network Port Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Figure 5-6.

DSL Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Figure 5-7.

Total Access 1248 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Figure 5-8.

Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Figure 5-9.

ATM Circuit Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Figure 5-10. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Figure 5-11. PVC/PVP Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Figure 5-12. Create a New PVC/PVP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Figure 5-13. Delete an Existing PVC/PVP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Figure 5-14. Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Figure 5-15. Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Figure 5-16. OAM Loopback Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Figure 5-17. Current ATM PVC Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Figure 5-18. ATM Quick Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Figure 5-19. ATM PVC/PVP Management Menu with 48 PVCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Figure 5-20. ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Figure 5-21. Restore ATM Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Figure 5-22. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Figure 5-23. ATM Performance Monitoring Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Figure 5-24. ATM Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

61179641AL1-5C ix

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Figure 5-25. ATM Port Cell Count Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Figure 5-26. ATM OAM Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Figure 5-27. Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Figure 5-28. System Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Figure 5-29. Password Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Figure 5-30. Password Control Levels Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Figure 5-31. Mode Selection and Current IP Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Figure 5-32. Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Figure 5-33. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Figure 5-34. Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Figure 5-35. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

Figure 5-36. Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

Figure 5-37. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Figure 5-38. Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Figure 5-39. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

Figure 5-40. Test IP Address Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

Figure 5-41. Time/Date Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

Figure 5-42. Current Baud Rate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

Figure 5-43. TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69

Figure 5-44. SNMP Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

Figure 5-45. SNMP Contact Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72

Figure 5-46. SNMP Community Names Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

Figure 5-47. SNMP Trap Hosts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Figure 5-48. Code Download Method Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Figure 5-49. Y-Modem Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78

Figure 5-50. TFTP Download Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79

Figure 5-51. Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81

Figure 5-52. Restore Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Figure 5-53. Reset System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Figure 5-54. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86

Figure 5-55. Self Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

Figure 5-56. External Alarms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

Figure 5-57. External Alarm Severity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Figure 5-58. Expansion Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Figure 5-59. Modem Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

Figure 5-60. Caller ID Features Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Figure 5-61. Network Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Figure 5-62. T1 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94

Figure 5-63. T1 Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96

Figure 5-64. T1 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98

Figure 5-65. T1 PM Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Figure 5-66. T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Figure 5-67. T1 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

Figure 5-68. Restore T1 Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Figure 5-69. E1 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

Figure 5-70. E1 Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

Figure 5-71. E1 Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107

x 61179641AL1-5C

Figures

Figure 5-72. E1 PM Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

Figure 5-73. E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109

Figure 5-74. E1 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

Figure 5-75. Restore E1 Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

Figure 5-76. IMA Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

Figure 5-77. IMA Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114

Figure 5-78. IMA Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115

Figure 5-79. IMA Facility Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116

Figure 5-80. IMA All Facilities Provisioning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117

Figure 5-81. Operation Mode for Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118

Figure 5-82. IMA Group Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119

Figure 5-83. IMA Shortcut Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121

Figure 5-84. IMA Scrambler Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122

Figure 5-85. Restore IMA Factory Defaults Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123

Figure 5-86. Status/Failure Monitoring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124

Figure 5-87. IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125

Figure 5-88. IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127

Figure 5-89. IMA Loopback Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131

Figure 5-90. IMA Performance Monitoring Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132

Figure 5-91. IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133

Figure 5-92. IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135

Figure 5-93. T1/E1 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137

Figure 5-94. DSL Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138

Figure 5-95. DSL Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139

Figure 5-96. ADSL Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140

Figure 5-97. Edit ADSL Profile Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141

Figure 5-98. Alarm Profiles Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144

Figure 5-99. Profile Settings for: Custom Name Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145

Figure 5-100. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147

Figure 5-101. Port Provisioning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148

Figure 5-102. Cabinet Mode for Port # Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151

Figure 5-103. ADSL Restore Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153

Figure 5-104. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154

Figure 5-105. DSP Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155

Figure 5-106. Reset DSP Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156

Figure 5-107. ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157

Figure 5-108. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159

Figure 5-109. Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160

Figure 5-110. ADSL Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161

Figure 5-111. All ADSL Ports Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162

Figure 5-112. ATU-R Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163

Figure 5-113. Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164

Figure 5-114. Alternate View of the Bit Allocation Table Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165

Figure 5-115. Upstream SNR Margin Table Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165

Figure 5-116. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-166

Figure 5-117. Performance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167

Figure 5-118. Current 15 Minute Performance Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167

61179641AL1-5C xi

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Figure 5-119. Select Shelf Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169

Figure 5-120. ADSL DELT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170

Figure 5-121. System Alarm Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171

Figure 5-122. System Event Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-172

Figure 5-123. Contact Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174

Figure 5-124. TL1 Mode Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-175

Figure 6-1.

Fan Module with Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

xii 61179641AL1-5C

Tables

Tables

Table 1-1.

Table 1-2.

Table 3-1.

Table 3-2.

Table 3-3.

Table 3-4.

Table 3-5.

Table 3-6.

Table 3-7.

Front Panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Compliance Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Total Access 1248 Shipping Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Turn-up and Provisioning Prerequisite information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Alarm Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

T1/E1/Modem Interface Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

POTS and ADSL+POTS Cable Pin Assignments for Left-most Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

POTS and ADSL+POTS Cable Pin Assignments for Right-most Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Order of Subtended Clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Table 4-1.

Table 5-1.

Table 5-2.

Table 5-3.

Table 5-4.

Table 5-5.

Table 5-6.

Table 5-7.

Default Provisioning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

General Keyboard Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Menu Specific Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Total Access 1248 Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

ATM Circuit Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

PVC/PVP Management Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Create a New PVC/PVP Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Table 5-8.

Table 5-9.

PVC/PVP Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Table 5-10.

PVC/PVP Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Table 5-11.

Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Table 5-12.

Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Table 5-13.

OAM Loopback Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Table 5-14.

OAM Loopback Test Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Table 5-15.

Current ATM PVC Performance Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Table 5-16.

Current ATM Port Performance Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Table 5-17.

ATM Quick Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Table 5-18.

ATM Parameters Defaults Screen Traffic Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Table 5-19.

Restore ATM Factory Defaults Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Table 5-20.

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Table 5-21.

ATM Performance Monitoring Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40

Table 5-22.

ATM Performance Monitoring Status Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Table 5-23.

ATM Port Cell Count Summary Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Table 5-24.

Clear All PM for All Ports Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Table 5-25.

ATM OAM Settings Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44

Table 5-26.

Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Table 5-27.

Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Table 5-28.

System Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

Table 5-29.

Password Control Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Table 5-30.

Password Control Levels for Default Usernames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Table 5-31.

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Table 5-32.

Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54

Table 5-33.

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Table 5-34.

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58

Table 5-35.

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59

61179641AL1-5C xiii

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-36.

Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

Table 5-37.

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Table 5-38.

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64

Table 5-39.

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

Table 5-40.

Test IP Address Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

Table 5-41.

Time/Date Adjust Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67

Table 5-42.

Current Baud Rate Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68

Table 5-43.

TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70

Table 5-44.

SNMP/TL1 Configuration Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

Table 5-45.

SNMP Contact Information Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72

Table 5-46.

SNMP Community Names Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73

Table 5-47.

SNMP Trap Hosts Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75

Table 5-48.

Code Download Method Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77

Table 5-49.

TFTP Download Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80

Table 5-50.

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82

Table 5-51.

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu Status Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Table 5-52.

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83

Table 5-53.

Restore Factory Defaults Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84

Table 5-54.

Reset System Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85

Table 5-55.

Self Test Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87

Table 5-56.

External Alarms Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88

Table 5-57.

External Alarm Severity Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89

Table 5-58.

Expansion Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Table 5-59.

Expansion Menu Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90

Table 5-60.

Modem Configuration Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91

Table 5-61.

Caller ID Features Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92

Table 5-62.

Network Port Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93

Table 5-63.

T1 Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95

Table 5-64.

T1 Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97

Table 5-65.

T1 Status Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99

Table 5-66.

T1 PM Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Table 5-67.

T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Table 5-68.

T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

Table 5-69.

T1 Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103

Table 5-70.

Restore T1 Factory Defaults Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104

Table 5-71.

E1 Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105

Table 5-72.

E1 Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106

Table 5-73.

E1 Status Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107

Table 5-74.

E1 PM Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108

Table 5-75.

E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109

Table 5-76.

E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110

Table 5-77.

E1 Test Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-111

Table 5-78.

Restore E1 Factory Defaults Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112

Table 5-79.

IMA Main Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113

Table 5-80.

IMA Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115

Table 5-81.

IMA Facility Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116

Table 5-82.

IMA All Facilities Provisioning Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117

xiv 61179641AL1-5C

Tables

Table 5-83.

Operation Mode for Facility Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118

Table 5-84.

IMA Group Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119

Table 5-85.

IMA Shortcut Setup Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121

Table 5-86.

IMA Scrambler Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122

Table 5-87.

Restore IMA Factory Defaults Menu Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123

Table 5-88.

Status/Failure Monitoring Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124

Table 5-89.

IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125

Table 5-90.

IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen States and Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127

Table 5-91.

IMA Loopback Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131

Table 5-92.

IMA Performance Monitoring Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132

Table 5-93.

IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133

Table 5-94.

IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134

Table 5-95.

IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135

Table 5-96.

IMA Performance Monitoring Status Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136

Table 5-97.

DSL Menus Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138

Table 5-98.

DSL Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139

Table 5-99.

ADSL Profiles Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140

Table 5-100. Edit ADSL Profile Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141

Table 5-101. Profile Settings for: Custom Name Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145

Table 5-102. Port Provisioning Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148

Table 5-103. Service State for ADSL Card Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149

Table 5-104. Service State for Port: # Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149

Table 5-105. Service Mode for Port: # Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150

Table 5-106. Hamband Mask for Port: # Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151

Table 5-107. Cabinet Mode for Port: # Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151

Table 5-108. Link Down Alarm for Port: # Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152

Table 5-109. ADSL Restore Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153

Table 5-110. DSP Management Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155

Table 5-111. Reset DSP Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156

Table 5-112. ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157

Table 5-113. ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158

Table 5-114. Status Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160

Table 5-115. Performance Monitoring Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168

Table 5-116. Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168

Table 5-117. ADSL DELT Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170

Table 5-118. System Alarm Log Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-171

Table 5-119. System Event Log Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173

Table 5-120. TL1 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176

Table 7-1.

Total Access 1248 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

61179641AL1-5C xv

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

This page is intentionally blank.

xvi 61179641AL1-5C

Section 1

Introduction

GENERAL

The Total Access 1248 (see

Figure 1-1 ) is a Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

(DSLAM) system that is used to further extend Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) services in the network.

1

3

2

T1/E

1

4

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

61179641AL1-5C

1179641AL1

T1/E1 1-4

PWR

ALM

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48 ETHERNET

T1/E1

Figure 1-1. Total Access 1248

ALARM

CRAFT

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

1-1

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

DESCRIPTION

The Total Access 1248 is a mini-DSLAM that accepts up to four T1 network feeds assigned to a single IMA group. Inverse Multiplexing over ATM (IMA) is a technology used to bond multiple

(DS1) links into a single data pipe.

The Total Access 1248 provides ADSL2+ service for up to 48 subscribers per unit. Plain Old

Telephone Service (POTS) is brought in from an on-board splitter and is placed on the same pair as the ADSL2+ signal. Since ADSL2+ and POTS are transported on the same twisted pair, the subscriber must use a low-pass filter on the line before attempting to use analog services.

The lines are configured for service with flow-through provisioning using a network configuration application such as Telcordia’s Network Configuration (NCON). Permanent Virtual

Circuits (PVCs) in the ATM network to the subscriber’s chosen Internet Service Provider (ISP) allow the subscriber access to the internet.

The Total Access 1248 contains a V.90 internal modem for remote access.

The Total Access 1248 is rack-mountable and measures 1.75 inches (1U) high, 17.25 inches wide, and 11.125 inches deep (measurements do not include the mounting brackets). The device may be powered using one or two –48 VDC sources, one for a non-redundant power configuration, two for a redundant power configuration.

For detailed specification information on the Total Access 1248 system, refer to “Section 7,

Specifications” .

Features

The Total Access 1248 system incorporates the following features:

• Front panel indication of network, customer, and power/self-test status

• 48 ports of ADSL2+ plus POTS

• Redundant power inputs

• POTS service is not power dependent

• Removable front-accessible fan module (P/N 1179675L1)

• Supports IMA for up to four T1/E1 IMA links

• ADSL options provisionable to accommodate both short and long haul T1s

• Provisioning and alarm monitoring via TL1, SNMP, local craft interface, and inband management channel

• IMA group support (one group)

• Operates over an extended temperature range of –40°C to +70°C

• Interoperable with any ATM T1 IMA device built to current IMA specifications, which includes the Total Access 3000 IMA Aggregation System

• Compliant with GR-63-CORE/GR-1089-CORE (NEBS), and Listed to the applicable UL

Safety Standard(s)

• Integrated V.90 modem

• Expansion capabilities for a total of three Total Access 1248 chassis to a Host unit

• In-band management of the expansion chassis

1-2 61179641AL1-5C

Description

Front Panel LEDs

Figure 1-2 shows the location of the Total Access 1248 front panel LEDs. Upon initial

powering, the Total Access 1248 system performs a power up self-test. Once the power up self-test is complete, the status LEDs reflect the condition of the hardware.

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

1179641AL1

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48

PWR

ALM

T1/E1

ETHERNET

T1/E1 1-4

Power and Alarm Expansion

T1/E1 Ethernet

Figure 1-2. Total Access 1248 Front Panel LEDs

ALARM

CRAFT

See Table 1-1

for a listing of LEDs and their status.

Label

PWR

ALM

T1/E1 1–4

ETHERNET

EXPANSION OUT

Status

Green

Yellow

Red

Off

Yellow

Red

Off

Green

4 Green Flashing

Yellow

4 Yellow Flashing

Red

Off

Green

4 Green Flashing

Yellow

Green

4 Green Flashing

Yellow

Table 1-1. Front Panel LEDs

Description

Total Access 1248 is In Service

Total Access 1248 is Out of Service-Maintenance

Total Access 1248 Failed self-test

No power present on Total Access 1248

Total Access 1248 is reporting a Minor alarm

Total Access 1248 is reporting a Major alarm

No alarms reported on Total Access 1248

All good

T1/E1 OK, no IMA Sync

Signal present OOF

T1/E1 is in loopback

No signal

Facility unassigned

Ethernet signal present

Ethernet with traffic

No signal

Connected to a downstream box

Connected with traffic

No signal

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

61179641AL1-5C 1-3

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Compliance

CAUTION

C A U T I O N !

SUBJECT TO ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE

OR DECREASE IN RELIABILITY.

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can damage electronic modules.

When handling modules, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place modules in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on modules, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

The Total Access 1248 is NRTL listed to the applicable UL standards. The Total Access 1248 meets or exceeds all the applicable requirements of NEBS, Telcordia GR-63-CORE, and

GR-1089-CORE.

The Total Access 1248 is intended for deployment in Central Office type facilities, EEEs,

EECs, and locations where the NEC applies. Install the Total Access 1248 in a restricted access location.

Table 1-2 shows the compliance codes for the Total Access 1248.

Table 1-2. Compliance Codes

Configuration Codes

Power Code (PC)

Telecommunication Code (TC)

Installation Code (IC)

Input

F

X

A

Output

C

X

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by ADTRAN could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

1-4 61179641AL1-5C

61179641AL1-5C

CAUTION

Per GR-1089-CORE the Total Access 1248 is designed and intended for installation as part of a Common Bonding Network

(CBN). The Total Access 1248 is not designed nor intended for installation as part of an Isolated Bonding Network (IBN).

CAUTION

Per GR-1089-CORE Section 9, the Total Access 1248 is intended to be deployed in either a DC-C (common) or DC-I (isolated) installation of the Total Access 1248.

CAUTION

The Total Access 1248 Chassis frame ground terminal must be connected to a reliable earth ground.

CAUTION

Connect to a reliably grounded –48 VDC source which is electrically isolated from the AC source. The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall be a fuse or circuit breaker rated minimum

48 VDC, maximum 3 A.

NOTE

The POTS and ADSL+POTS ports are classified as Type 1, 3, and 5 as defined in Appendix B of GR-1089-CORE, Issue 4 and meets the lightning and power fault criteria with any primary protector that meets any of the voltage limits of GR-974-CORE or GR-1361-CORE

(i.e., carbon blocks, gas tubes, solid states, etc.). Solid-state primary protectors are not recommended as they could affect the signal integrity of the ADSL.

NOTE

Current limiting protectors are not required.

Description

1-5

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

This page is intentionally blank.

1-6 61179641AL1-5C

Section 2

Application Guidelines

INTRODUCTION

The Total Access 1248 provides 48 ADSL2+ plus POTS ports downstream to the subscriber, one to four T1 IMA ports upstream to the network, local and remote management capabilities, and front panel LEDs that indicate status.

Figure 2-1

illustrates an operational scenario for the Total Access 1248.

Voice Switch or DLC Providing 1-48 POTS

POTS Ports 1-24 POTS Ports 25-48

Central Office or Remote Terminal

Quad IMA Providing 1-4 DS1s

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

To Ground

1179641AL1

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48

PWR

ALM

T1/E1

ETHERNET

T1/E1 1-4 A B

-48V RET -48V RET

USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY!

-48V .....,5.0A

ALARM

CRAFT

Power

24 Ports 24 Ports

Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber Subscriber

Figure 2-1. Total Access 1248 Operational Scenario

61179641AL1-5C 2-1

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

EXPANSION

Up to four Total Access 1248 systems can be connected together (see Figure 2-2 ). One of the

units must be a Total Access 1248 Host unit (e.g., P/N 1179641AL1) and the others are Total

Access 1248 Client units (P/N 1179641L5).

The client units (also referred to as Expansion units) have RJ-45 jacks, labeled EXPANSION IN and OUT, for the purpose of expanding one to another.

The Total Access 1248 provides the network connection for all of the client units. All provisioning for the clients is completed through the Host unit.

Beginning with the host, a Category 5e, non-crossover cable is connected from the EXPANSION

OUT jack of the host to the EXPANSION IN jack of the first client unit. Further connections between client unit EXPANSION OUT jacks to EXPANSION IN jacks continue until a total of up to three client units have been connected with the third client unit having only a connection to the EXPANSION IN jack.

Host

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

1179641AL1

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48

PWR

ALM

T1/E1

ETHERNET

T1/E1 1-4 A B

-48V RET -48V RET

ALARM

CRAFT

Client 1

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48

PWR

ALM

1179641L5

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

B

-48V RET

-48V RET

EXPANSION

IN

EXPANSION

OUT

USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY!

-48V .....,5.0A

CRAFT

Client 2

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48

PWR

ALM

1179641L5

B

-48V RET

-48V RET

EXPANSION

IN

EXPANSION

OUT

USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY!

-48V .....,5.0A

CRAFT

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

Client 3

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

1179641L5

B

-48V RET

-48V RET

PWR

ALM

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48

EXPANSION

IN

EXPANSION

OUT

USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY!

-48V .....,5.0A

Figure 2-2. Expansion Cabling

CRAFT

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

2-2 61179641AL1-5C

Section 3

Installation

INTRODUCTION

C A U T I O N !

SUBJECT TO ELECTROSTATIC DAMAGE

OR DECREASE IN RELIABILITY.

HANDLING PRECAUTIONS REQUIRED.

CAUTION

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) can damage electronic units. When handling units, wear an antistatic discharge wrist strap to prevent damage to electronic components. Place units in antistatic packing material when transporting or storing. When working on units, always place them on an approved antistatic mat that is electrically grounded.

After unpacking the Total Access 1248, inspect it for damage. If damage has occurred, file a claim with the carrier and then contact ADTRAN Customer Service. Refer to

“Appendix A,

Warranty”

for further information. If possible, keep the original shipping container to return the Total Access 1248 for repair or for verification of shipping damage.

61179641AL1-5C 3-1

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Shipping Contents

The shipping container for the Total Access 1248 includes the contents shown in

Table 3-1

.

Table 3-1. Total Access 1248 Shipping Contents

Description

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem

Installation and Maintenance Practice

Cable Assembly, Ground Wire

Terminal Block

Mounting Bracket, 19-inch

Mounting Bracket, 23-inch

Screw, 8-32 × 1/4

Screw, 8-32 × 3/16

Cable Tie

Part Number

1179641AL1

61179641AL1-5

3125P037@

32024CON10

3265540

3265541

3276003007

327611034

3292032

Quantity

1

1

4

4

5

2

2

1

1

Required Tools

The following tools and materials are required to install the Total Access 1248:

• Wire-wrap tool

• #2 phillips-head screwdriver

• #1 phillips-head screwdriver

• Straight-slot screwdriver

• Multimeter (ohmmeter and voltmeter)

• Crimping tool for power lugs

• Wire strippers

• Side cutters

3-2 61179641AL1-5C

Installation Prerequisites

INSTALLATION PREREQUISITES

The following items should be completed prior to installing the Total Access 1248:

1. Make sure that the network feed is in place.

2. Make sure that local power is available and that the required fuses are installed.

CAUTION

The maximum power draw for the Total Access 1248 system is 75 watts.

ADTRAN recommends an external fuse rated at 3.0 amps.

3. Complete Table 3-2 with the information that is needed to turn-up and provision the Total

Access 1248.

Table 3-2. Turn-up and Provisioning Prerequisite information

Item Description

Network Feed/Aggregation System IP Address

Network Feed/Aggregation System Port

Total Access 1248 IP Address

Total Access 1248 Default Gateway

Total Access 1248 Subnet Mask

Total Access 1248 VPI/VCI

Number of Network Facilities Feeding the Total Access 1248

CLEI Code/System Name

Value

61179641AL1-5C 3-3

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

INSTALLATION STEPS

The following steps are required to install the Total Access 1248. Each step has an associated procedure which is referenced below the step. Each procedure provides detailed information for completing the step.

1. Mount the Total Access 1248 system with the appropriate hardware.

For detailed information, refer to

“Mounting the Total Access 1248” on page 3-5.

2. Ground the Total Access 1248.

For detailed information, refer to

“Ground Connection” on page 3-8.

3. Make the power connections to the Total Access 1248.

For detailed information, refer to

“Power Connection” on page 3-9.

4. Connect the Ethernet cable to the Total Access 1248.

For detailed information, refer to

“Ethernet Connection” on page 3-11.

5. Connect the DB-15 male alarm cable connector to the Total Access 1248 and wire-wrap the connections to an alarm panel.

For detailed information, refer to

“Alarm Connections” on page 3-12.

6. Connect the network cable.

For detailed information, refer to

“Network Connections” on page 3-13.

7. Connect the ADSL2+ plus POTS and POTS cables.

For detailed information, refer to

“ADSL2+ Plus POTS Connections” on page 3-14.

8. Turn-up the Total Access 1248.

For detailed information, refer to

“Quick Turn-up Steps” on page 3-19.

3-4 61179641AL1-5C

Installation Steps

Mounting the Total Access 1248

The Total Access 1248 is shipped with two sets of mounting brackets that accommodate either a 19-inch or 23-inch rack.

• The mounting brackets used for a 19-inch rack are part number 3265540.

• The mounting brackets used for a 23-inch rack are part number 3265541.

The mounting brackets provide for flush or mid-mounting configurations. Figure 3-1 shows

the Total Access 1248 mounting bracket installation options. Four screws (supplied with the unit) are required for mounting the brackets to the system.

19-inch Mounting Brackets

1

3

2

T1/

E1

4

FRONT

BACK

61179641AL1-5C

P/N 3265540

23-inch Mounting Brackets

1

3

2

T1/E

1

4

FRONT

BACK

Figure 3-1. Mounting Brackets

P/N 3265541

3-5

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Flush-mount

For flush-mount systems, the Total Access 1248 must be mounted from the front of the rack, with mounting brackets in the flush-mounting orientation (see

Figure 3-2

). When flushmounting a Total Access 1248 in the rack, use a #2 phillips-head screwdriver and attach the mounting brackets to the front screw holes with the flanges containing the slotted rackmounting holes facing the front of the Total Access 1248.

Using four screws appropriate for the mounting rack and the appropriate screwdriver, secure the Total Access 1248 in place on the rack.

1

3

2

T1/

E1

4

Flush-mount Orientation

FRONT

BACK

19-inch Mounting Brackets

3-6

23-inch Mounting Brackets

Figure 3-2. Flush-mount Orientation

61179641AL1-5C

Installation Steps

Mid-mount

For mid-mount systems, the Total Access 1248 must be mounted from the front of the rack,

with mounting brackets in the mid-mounting orientation (see Figure 3-3

). For mid-mounting a

Total Access 1248 in the rack, use a #2 phillips-head screwdriver and attach the mounting brackets to the rear screw holes with the flanges containing the slotted rack-mounting holes facing the front of the Total Access 1248.

Using four screws appropriate for the mounting rack and the appropriate screwdriver, secure the Total Access 1248 in place on the rack.

1

3

2

T1/E

1

4

Mid-mount Orientation

FRONT

BACK

19-inch Mounting Brackets

61179641AL1-5C

23-inch Mounting Brackets

Figure 3-3. Mid-mount Orientation

3-7

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Ground Connection

The ground wire must be 12 to 18 AWG, however, it must be as large or larger than the wire used for power. The Total Access 1248 must be grounded to a reliable grounding source.

To connect the ground wire, perform the following steps:

1. Connect the ground wire (fitted with a loop terminal end) to the ground lug on the front of

the Total Access 1248 (see Figure 3-4 ).

2. Clean the surface of the frame ground source and apply an appropriate antioxidant.

3. Connect the other end of the ground wire to the grounded frame.

4. Using an ohmmeter, verify continuity between the ground lug and a known good frame ground. The reading should be less than 1 ohm.

1

3

2

T1/

E1

4

3-8

Figure 3-4. Total Access 1248 Ground Connection

61179641AL1-5C

Installation Steps

Power Connection

The Total Access 1248 provides redundant power inputs. Two sources of – 48 VDC must be provided to use the redundant power feature. The power wires must be 12 to 18 AWG stranded copper. The Total Access 1248 uses a four-point terminal block (see

Figure 3-5 ) to

accept the –48 VDC and –48 VDC RET leads.

-48 VDC A

-48 VDC A RET

-48 VDC B

-48 VDC B RET

Figure 3-5. Four-point Terminal Block

NOTE

If a non-redundant power configuration is to be implemented, use the connections marked –48 VDC A and –48 VDC A RET .

To connect the power source, perform the following steps:

1. With the power disconnected at the source, remove approximately 1/4-inch of insulation from the ends of both power wires.

NOTE

ADTRAN recommends an external fuse rated at 3 amps.

2. Using a small flat-head screwdriver, loosen the setscrews on the top of the terminal block.

3. Insert the bare wire into the opening on the front of the terminal block, making sure that the wire is inserted correctly according to the labeling on the unit above the terminal block.

4. While holding the wire in place, tighten the setscrew until the wire is secure.

5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until all power leads are connected.

6. Apply power to the Total Access 1248 and test the voltage and polarity on the terminal block using the tops of the setscrews as test points.

61179641AL1-5C 3-9

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Fans/Fan Filter

The Total Access 1248 is shipped with a pre-installed fan module (P/N 1179675L1). The fan

module is located on the right side of the unit, and contains four fans (see Figure 3-6 ). The

fans move filtered air (if the filter is installed) into the Total Access 1248 chassis and out through the exhaust slots on the left side.

The fans are monitored by the system and are tested during power-up or when a fan module is installed. The fans can also be manually tested from the Self-test Menu. If any fan fails, the

PWR LED lights red indicating a self-test failure. At the same time, a minor alarm is generated indicating the problem. This also occurs if the fan(s) fail during use. If the fan module is removed from the shelf for replacement and/or maintenance, the alarm can be suppressed depending on the fan alarm delay.

The fans are thermostatically controlled and are only powered on when necessary. Initially, only one fan is activated. The fans are alternated to maintain the specified temperature level.

If the temperature continues to rise, all fans are used at the same time. In the event the temperature still remains too high, the ADSL circuits are shut down until a safe operating temperature is reached.

The fan module and fan filter are field-replaceable.

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

3-10

Figure 3-6. Total Access 1248 Fan Module

FAN

MODULE

61179641AL1-5C

Installation Steps

Ethernet Connection

The Total Access 1248 interfaces with networks for management through an Ethernet port

(see

Figure 3-7 ).

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

PORTS 1-24

PWR

ALM

T1/E1

ETHERNET

T1/E1

Figure 3-7. Total Access 1248 Ethernet Port

The following Ethernet protocols are supported:

• IEEE 802.3, 10/100Base-T

• DHCP Client Mode for Management

• SNMP

.....

.

,5.0A

61179641AL1-5C 3-11

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Alarm Connections

The Total Access 1248 provides an alarm port (see

Figure 3-8

) with three auxiliary alarm inputs and three alarm outputs (Major, Minor, and Critical). If load shedding is active then the

Critical alarm output will be active. Alarm inputs are activated by shorting A and B contacts

(closing an externally connected relay). The outputs provide both normally open and normally closed pins (through internal relay contacts) for proper operation with a variety of alarm panels. Each alarm event generates an autonomous TL1 message that is transmitted via the in-band management channel to a monitoring device.

A cable with a high density DB-15 male connector on one end and a stub at the other end is available (P/N 1196DB901L1) for wire-wrap connections to an alarm panel.

1179641AL1

PORTS 1-24

A

-48V RET

EXPANSION

OUT

USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY!

.

Figure 3-8. Total Access 1248 Alarm Connection

ALARM

Pin

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

The alarm pinouts are shown in Table 3-3 .

Table 3-3. Alarm Pinouts

Color

Red

Red/Black

Red/White

Orange

Orange/Black

White

White/Black

Black

Black/White

Blue/Black

Blue/White

Blue

Green/Black

Green/White

Green

Contact Description

Alarm 3 Input - A

Alarm 1 Input - B

Critical Alarm COM

Minor Alarm COM

Major Alarm COM

Alarm 3 Input - B

Alarm 2 Input - A

Critical Alarm NC

Minor Alarm NC

Major Alarm NC

Alarm 2 Input - B

Alarm 1 Input - A

Critical Alarm NO

Minor Alarm NO

Major Alarm NO

3-12 61179641AL1-5C

Installation Steps

Network Connections

Network connections are accomplished via the 50-pin amphenol connector labeled T1/E1 1-4

(see Figure 3-9 )

. See

Table 3-4 for the pinout of the T1/E1 interface and the analog modem.

1179641AL1

T1/E1 1-4 A

-48V RET

PORTS 1-24

Figure 3-9. Total Access 1248 Network Connection

Table 3-4. T1/E1/Modem Interface Pinout

Pin Numbers

1, 26

2, 27

3, 28

4, 29

5, 30

6, 31

7, 32

8, 33

9, 34

10, 35

11, 36

12, 37

13, 38

14, 39

15, 40

16, 41

17–24

42–49

25, 50

Description

RX Tip/Ring 1

TX Tip/Ring 1

RX Tip/Ring 2

TX Tip/Ring 2

RX Tip/Ring 3

TX Tip/Ring 3

RX Tip/Ring 4

TX Tip/Ring 4

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Modem Tip/Ring

61179641AL1-5C 3-13

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ADSL2+ Plus POTS Connections

The Total Access 1248 utilizes four 25-pair amphenol connectors (see Figure 3-10

), which are used as follows:

• Two amphenols for connection to the POTS pairs

• Two amphenols for connection to the ADSL2+ plus POTS pairs

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 1-24

FAN MODULE

1179675L1

TOP:POTS BOTTOM: ADSL+POTS PORTS 25-48

1179641AL1

R

M

T1/E1

ETHERNET

-48V RET -48V RET

EXPANSION

OUT

USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY!

..

Figure 3-10. Total Access 1248 POTS and ADSL+POTS Connections

POTS Interface

Each POTS interface on the Total Access 1248 accepts a POTS signal from the CO and passes it through to the ADSL2+ plus POTS interface for delivery to the subscriber. POTS service is not affected by loss of power to the unit.

ADSL2+ Plus POTS Interface

Each ADSL2+ plus POTS interface provides transport for standard POTS from the Central

Office (CO) to the customer. The frequency ranges for Total Access 1248 deployment are as follows:

• POTS accommodates frequency ranges up to 4 kHz

• ADSL and ADSL2 accommodates frequency ranges up to 1.1 MHz

• ADSL2+ accommodates frequency ranges up to 2.2 MHz

Any analog devices connected to this interface must use a low-pass filter to prevent high frequencies from interfering with the device.

3-14 61179641AL1-5C

Installation Steps

POTS Connection

The Total Access 1248 must be connected to a POTS source to provide POTS to the subscribers. In a standard configuration, the POTS will be brought in from a nearby crossconnect. The Total Access 1248 accepts the POTS signal on the top two amphenol connectors labeled POTS. There is a one-to-one correlation between the pins on the POTS amphenol connectors and the pins on the ADSL plus POTS (ADSL+POTS) amphenol connectors. Refer to the

“Customer Connections (ADSL+POTS)”

section below for more information.

To establish a POTS connection, perform the following steps:

1. Connect the cables with the 25-pair female amphenol connectors to the male amphenol connectors provided, labeled POTS.

2. Tighten the screws (normally provided with each amphenol connector attached to the cable) on the right side of each amphenol connector, and use the cable ties (provided) through the tie brackets (provided) to secure the left side of the amphenol connectors.

NOTE

This wire tie may be used to assist in routing the power cables and the ADSL+POTS cables that originate from the right most amphenol connector.

NOTE

The POTS interface may be connected to the outside plant.

Customer Connections (ADSL+POTS)

The Total Access 1248 provides 48 ADSL+POTS ports on two 50-pin male amphenol connectors. POTS is brought in from the Central Office (CO) on the POTS amphenol connectors as described in the preceding section. The ADSL is generated locally and placed on the same pair as the corresponding POTS signal for delivery to the subscriber.

There is a one-to-one correlation between the pins on the ADSL+POTS amphenol connectors and the pins on the POTS amphenol connectors. Refer to the

“POTS Connection” section above

for more information. The 25th pair is not used. To establish the ADSL+POTS connection, perform the following steps:

1. Connect the 25-pair female amphenol connectors to the male amphenol connectors provided, labeled ADSL+POTS .

2. Tighten the screws (normally provided with each amphenol connector attached to the cable) on the right side of each amphenol connector, and use the cable ties (provided) placed through the tie brackets (provided) to secure the left side of the amphenol connectors.

The pin assignments for the left and right POTS and ADSL+POTS cables are shown in

Table 3-5 and Table 3-6

.

61179641AL1-5C 3-15

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 3-5. POTS and ADSL+POTS Cable Pin Assignments for Left-most Connectors

6

7

4

5

Pair #

1

2

3

10

11

8

9

12

Pins R.T.

1, 26

2, 27

3, 28

4, 29

5, 30

6, 31

7, 32

8, 33

9, 34

10, 35

11, 36

12, 37

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

Pair #

13

14

15

Pins R.T.

13, 38

14, 39

15, 40

16, 41

17, 42

18, 43

19, 44

20, 45

21, 46

22, 47

23, 48

24, 49

25, 50 Not used

Table 3-6. POTS and ADSL+POTS Cable Pin Assignments for Right-most Connectors

Pair #

30

31

32

33

26

27

28

29

34

35

36

37

Pins R.T.

1, 26

2, 27

3, 28

4, 29

5, 30

6, 31

7, 32

8, 33

9, 34

10, 35

11, 36

12, 37

Pair #

42

43

44

45

38

39

40

41

46

47

48

49

50

Pins R.T.

13, 38

14, 39

15, 40

16, 41

17, 42

18, 43

19, 44

20, 45

21, 46

22, 47

23, 48

24, 49

25, 50 Not used

3-16 61179641AL1-5C

Total Access 1200F Conversion

TOTAL ACCESS 1200F CONVERSION

CAUTION

The order of subtended Total Access 1200 Series DSLAMS must be preserved when connecting to the Total Access 1200F for translation to the legacy ATM mode PVCs. See

Table 3-7 .

Table 3-7. Order of Subtended Clients

Total Access 1200F Expansion Port

1

2

3

4

Total Access 1200 Series Client

Total Access 1100 Series Host

(Client 1)

Client 2

Client 3

Client 4

Existing Total Access 1200 Series DSLAM installations require a software upgrade to convert the Total Access 1200 Series DSLAMs to function with a Total Access 1200F.

To upgrade each Total Access 1200 Series DSLAM, perform the following steps:

CAUTION

Upgrading the firmware disrupts DSL service to the customer.

1. Connect a VT100-capable laptop/terminal to the CRAFT port of a Total Access 1200 Series

DSLAM (see

Figure 3-11 for the location of the

CRAFT port).

PORTS 1-24

ALARM

CRAFT

Figure 3-11. Total Access 1100 Series DSLAM Craft Port

2. Set the terminal baud rate to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, and no flow control.

NOTE

The 4-MB Flash Upgrade must be made at 9600 baud.

61179641AL1-5C 3-17

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

3. Press and hold the Y key on the terminal keyboard and apply power to the Total Access

1200 Series DSLAM.

4. When prompted, select 38400 for a faster transfer rate (20 minutes at 38400 compared to

60 minutes at 9600).

If using HyperTerminal, go off-line, select properties, change the baud rate, then go back online. VT100 settings should be set as follows:

• Baud Rate: 38400

• Data Bits: 8

• Parity: None

• Stop Bits: 1

• Flow Control: None

If properly connected, a row of CCCCs should begin to display on the screen.

5. Download the current file identified by network administration using the Y-Modem protocol.

If using HyperTerminal, use the Transfer > Send File... Browse... dialogue and identify the file by name and location. Select YModem , then click Send .

6. Several messages are displayed that report system progress for the upgrade procedure, including the following:

• Erasing Flash

• Erase Complete

• Programming Flash

• Programming Complete

• Comparing Flash to SDRAM

• Verify Done

• Please set Baud Rate to 9600 and Reboot Unit Now

7. Reboot the Total Access 1200 Series DSLAM when the download is completed.

8. Repeat steps 1

through

7 for each Total Access 1200 Series DSLAM.

9. Connect the Total Access 1200F expansion cables at the DSLAM end.

10. Provision, test, and turn up the equipment. Refer to “Section 4, Provisioning Defaults” and “Section 5, User Interface” of the Total Access 1200F Installation and Maintenance

Practice (P/N 61179660L1-5) for detailed instructions on provisioning the equipment.

NOTE

Access to the Total Access 1200 Series units is now available through the Total Access 1200F craft access of Inband

Management access ports.

3-18 61179641AL1-5C

Quick Turn-up Steps

QUICK TURN-UP STEPS

Perform the following steps to complete a basic T1 turn-up of the Total Access 1248 system:

1. Connect VT100 terminal or personal computer emulating a VT100 terminal to the Total

Access 1248 craft port.

For more information, refer to “Craft Interface” on page 5-1.

2. Press C TRL +R

until the Login screen (see Figure 3-12

) displays.

Total Access 1248

Login: ADMIN

Password: ********

Figure 3-12. Login Screen

3. Enter the default username, “ADMIN” (or the configured username with System

Administrator privileges), and press E NTER

.

4. Enter the default password, “PASSWORD” (or the configured password), and press E NTER .

NOTE

The username and password fields are case sensitive. The default values are all uppercase. For more information, refer to

“Password

Control Menu” on page 5-49.

The Total Access 1248 Main menu displays (see

Figure 3-13 ).

61179641AL1-5C 3-19

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

TID: HSVL00001 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Total Access 1248

1. Configuration

2. ATM Circuit Management

3. System Management

4. Network Port

5. DSL Menus

6. System Alarms

7. System Event Log

8. Contact Information

9. Enter TL1 mode

10. Logoff

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 3-13. Total Access 1248 Main Menu

5. Provision the appropriate network termination.

6. From the Total Access 1248 Main menu, select Network Port , and press E NTER

.

The Network Port menu (see

Figure 3-14 ) displays.

TID: HSVL00001 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Network Port

1. T1

2. IMA

3. Select T1/E1 Mode

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 3-14. Network Port Menu

7. From the Network Port menu, select T1 , and press E NTER

.

3-20 61179641AL1-5C

Quick Turn-up Steps

8. The T1 Main Menu (see

Figure 3-15 ) displays.

TID: HSVL00001 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1 Main Menu

1. T1 Provisioning

2. T1 Status

3. T1 Performance

4. Test

5. Restore T1 Factory Defaults

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 3-15. T1 Main Menu

9. From the T1 Main Menu, select T1 Provisioning , and press E NTER

.

The T1 Provisioning menu (see

Figure 3-16 ) displays.

TID: HSVL00001 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1 Provisioning for # 1

1. Type DSX

2. Framing ESF

3. Line Code B8ZS

4. Line Build Out 0 - 133 ft

'N' - Next T1 Port 'P' - Previous T1 Port

Selection :

61179641AL1-5C

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 3-16. T1 Provisioning Screen

3-21

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

10. From the T1 Provisioning menu, configure the Type , Framing , Line Code , and Line Build Out setting to match the settings of the T1s provided. Press N to access the next T1 to configure and continue this process until all the T1s are properly configured.

11. From the T1 Provisioning menu, press E SC

to return to the T1 Main Menu.

12. From the T1 Main Menu, select T1 Status, and press E NTER

.

13. From the T1 Status menu, confirm that the T1s do not have active alarms.

NOTE

If the T1s have active alarms, this is an indication of a network feed issue.

14. From the T1 Status menu, press E SC

until the Network Port menu displays.

15. From the Network Port menu, select IMA and press E NTER

.

16. From the IMA Main Menu, select Provisioning , and press E NTER

.

17. From the IMA Provisioning menu, select IMA Facility , and press E NTER

.

18. From the IMA Facility Provisioning for # 1 menu, select Facility Operation Mode , and press

E NTER

.

19. From the Operation Mode for Facility for # 1 menu, provision the facilities as appropriate.

For more information, refer to “Operation Mode for Facility Menu” on page 5-118.

The default settings assign the four facilities to the IMA Group.

20. From the Operation Mode for Facility for # 1 menu, press E SC

until the IMA Provisioning menu displays.

21. From the IMA Provisioning menu, select IMA Group , and press E NTER

.

22. From the IMA Group Provisioning menu, select Group Operation Mode , and press E NTER

.

23. From the Group Operation Mode menu, select In Service , and press E NTER

.

24. Press E SC

until the Main Menu displays.

25. From the Main Menu, select System Management , and press E NTER

.

26. From the System Management menu, select IP Address , and press E NTER

.

27. From the Mode Selection and Current IP Settings menu, verify that the Mode is set to

Static .

28. From the Mode Selection and Current IP Settings menu, select Configure IP , and press

E NTER .

29. From the Status IP Settings - for IP over ATM menu, configure the following fields:

• IP Address

• Subnet Mask

• VPI/VCI

• Default Gateway

3-22 61179641AL1-5C

Quick Turn-up Steps

30. Add the IP address to the network routers/servers.

31. Press E SC

until the System Management menu displays.

32. From the System Management menu, select Test IP Address , and press E NTER

.

The Test IP Address menu is displayed (see

Figure 3-17 ).

TID: HSVL00001 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Test IP Address

1. IP Address Not configured

2. Ping Timeout 1 secs 4. Start Ping

3. Number of Pings 4 pings 5. Start Traceroute

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 3-17. Test IP Address Menu

33. From the Test IP Address menu, select IP Address , and press E NTER

.

The IP Address field is highlighted.

34. Enter the IP address of the default gateway to Ping in decimal dot format, and press E NTER

.

35. From the IP Address menu, select Start Ping , and press E NTER

to initiate the Ping.

36. Confirm that the Traffic Descriptor default values match the local practices and modify accordingly.

37. Add the Service Profiles to the Total Access 1248 for the approved service.

38. Pre-provision the system using the information provided in the appropriate work order.

39. Place the DSL ports In Service, as needed.

61179641AL1-5C 3-23

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

This page is intentionally blank.

3-24 61179641AL1-5C

Section 4

Provisioning Defaults

INTRODUCTION

The Total Access 1248 system default provisioning options are shown in

Table 4-1

. For

detailed information on the Total Access 1248 menus, refer to “Section 5, User Interface” .

Provisioning Option

ATM Circuit Options

PVCs

Table 4-1. Default Provisioning Options

Available Options Default Setting

User definable (Each ADSL connection must have at least one PVC/PVP for data flow.)

UBR; CBR; VBR-rt; VBR-nrt

None

UBR Traffic Descriptors

(Service options)

System Management

Password Control

Set Login Name

Access Level

Control Level

Allow SNMP Security

Management

Set Menus Idle Logout

Time

TL1 Menus Idle Logout

Time

TL1 Inband Idle Logout

Time

User defined

Read Only; Technician; System

Administrator

Read Only; Read/Write

Enabled; Disabled

1–60 minutes

1–120 minutes

1–120 minutes

Not configured

Not configured

Not configured

Disabled

10 minutes

30 minutes

120 minutes

61179641AL1-5C 4-1

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 4-1. Default Provisioning Options (Continued)

Provisioning Option Available Options

IP Address

IP Feed

IP Mode

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

TFTP IP Address

TL1 Port Number

TL1 IP Transport Type

Test IP Address

RFC1483 Routed; IP over Ethernet;

RFC1483 Bridged

Dynamic; Static

0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255

0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255

0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255

0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255

1023 or greater

TCP; UDP

Test IP Address

Ping Timeout

Number of Pings

Baud Rate

0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255

1–10 seconds

1–8 pings

Baud Rate

SNMP Contact Information

9600; 19200; 38400

Contact

Name

55-character string

55-character string

Location

SNMP Community Names

55-character string

Name

IP Address

32-character string

0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255

Read/Write; Read Privileges

SNMP Trap Hosts

Trap Port

IP Address

1–65535

0–255.0–255.0–255.0–255

SNMPv1; SNMPv2 Version

SNMP Traps Enabled

SNMP Traps Enabled Yes; No

Default Setting

RFC1483 Routed

Dynamic

0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0

Not configured

Not configured

13001

TCP

Not configured

1 second

4 pings

9600

ADTRAN, Inc. (256) 963-8000

Not configured

Customer specified

Not Configured *

0.0.0.0

162

Not configured

Not Configured

Yes

4-2 61179641AL1-5C

Introduction

Table 4-1. Default Provisioning Options (Continued)

Provisioning Option Available Options Default Setting

External Alarms

Alarm Name

Alarm Severity

Fan Alarm Delay

Network Port

E1 Provisioning

E1 Framing

E1 Line Code

T1 Provisioning

T1 Type

T1 Framing

T1 Line Code

T1 Line Build Out

25-character string

Critical; Major; Minor; Load shedding

0–15 minutes

FAS; FAS+CRC

HDB3; AMI

External Alarm Input #

Minor

10 Minutes

FAS+CRC

HDB3

IMA Provisioning

Facility Operation Mode

Group Operation Mode

IMA Transmit ID

IMA Transmit Frame

Length

IMA_Group; Unassigned; Pass-through IMA_Group

In Service; Out of Service-Maintenance;

Out of Service-Unassigned

Out of Service-Maintenance

0-255

32; 64; 128; 256

Minimum TX Active Links 1-4

Minimum RX Active Links 1-4

Maximum Link Diff Delay 0-100

Scrambler Enable; Disable

101

128

1

1

100

Disabled

DSL Menus

ADSL Provisioning

Card Service State

Line Service State

DSX; T1

ESF; SF

B8ZS; AMI

DSX Type: 0-133 ft; 133-266 ft;

266-399 ft; 399-533 ft; 533-655 ft

T1 Type: 0 dB; –7.5 dB; –15 dB;–22.5 dB

In Service; Out of Service-Maintenance;

Out of Service-Unassigned

In Service; Out of Service-Maintenance;

Out of Service-Unassigned

DSX

ESF

B8ZS

0–133 ft

0 dB

In Service

Out of Service-Maintenance

61179641AL1-5C 4-3

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 4-1. Default Provisioning Options (Continued)

Provisioning Option Available Options Default Setting

Service Mode

Cabinet Mode

Hamband Mask

Link Down Alarm

Rate Mode

Multimode; T1.413; G.dmt; G.lite;

ADSL2; ADSL2.lite; ADSL2+; READSL;

Legacy Multimode

Disabled; Enabled

Disabled; Enabled

Disabled; Enabled

Fixed; Rate Adaptive

Multimode

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Rate adaptive

Line Type Interleave; Fast Fast

* SNMP Community Names are case-sensitive. The Total Access 1248 system provides two SNMP Community

Name accounts with the following defaults:

• Name:

• IP Address: private

0.0.0.0

• Privileges: Read/Write

• Name:

• IP Address: public

0.0.0.0

• Privileges: Read

4-4 61179641AL1-5C

Section 5

User Interface

INTRODUCTION

This section provides detailed information on the following:

“System Management” on page 5-1

“Logging on to the Total Access 1248” on page 5-3

“Menu Structure” on page 5-4

“Menu Navigation” on page 5-5

“Menu Tree” on page 5-9

“Menu Descriptions” on page 5-15

SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Total Access 1248 system management and provisioning is facilitated by a series of intuitive menus that are accessible on a computer screen. The Total Access 1248 provides two methods for management access:

“Craft Interface” on page 5-1

“Inband Management Interface” on page 5-2

Craft Interface

Connection to the Total Access 1248 system menus can be made through the DB-9 connector, labeled CRAFT, on the front of the Total Access 1248 system. A DB-9 straight cable is required.

The craft port is located behind the front panel cover (see Figure 5-1 ) of the Total Access 1248.

PORTS 1-24

ALARM

CRAFT

Figure 5-1. Craft Port Location

61179641AL1-5C 5-1

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Most personal computers or laptops can run communications software that emulates a VT100 terminal. Windows programs such as Terminal or HyperTerminal are two such examples in the Windows format, but there are many other adequate, commercially available software packages, virtually all of which allow the PC or laptop to emulate a VT100 terminal. Certain configuration items must be set on a PC or laptop to act as a VT100 terminal for the Total

Access 1248.

1. Set the parameters of the communications software to the following settings:

• 9600 baud rate

• 8 data bits

• No parity

• 1 stop bit

• No flow control

2. Set the PC for direct connect on the appropriate communications port (as opposed to dial up connection).

3. Plug the male end of the data cable into the Total Access 1248. Make connection to the PC or laptop as appropriate for the equipment.

Inband Management Interface

To access the Total Access 1248 through the inband management method, use an appropriate

Telnet client to access the management interface of the Total Access 1248 at the configured IP address. For more information, refer to

“System Management Menu” on page 5-47.

NOTE

A craft port session takes priority over a Telnet session. An active craft port session must be terminated before a Telnet session can be successfully started. When a craft port session is initiated, any active Telnet session is automatically disconnected.

5-2 61179641AL1-5C

Logging on to the Total Access 1248

LOGGING ON TO THE TOTAL ACCESS 1248

To logon to the Total Access 1248 system, perform the following steps:

1. Establish the physical connection to the Total Access 1248.

2. If a craft port session is being used, proceed to step 3

. If using a Telnet session proceed to

step 4 .

3. Press C TRL +R until the Login prompt appears.

The Login screen displays (see Figure 5-2 ).

Total Access 1248

Login: ADMIN

Password: ********

Figure 5-2. Login Screen

NOTE

The Total Access 1248 system requires the username and associated password.

4. Enter the default username, “ADMIN” (or the configured username with System Administrator privileges), and press E NTER

.

5. Enter the default password, “PASSWORD” (or the configured password), and press E NTER .

NOTE

The username and password fields are case sensitive. The default values are all uppercase. For more information, refer to

“Password

Control Menu” on page 5-49.

61179641AL1-5C 5-3

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

MENU STRUCTURE

The menu structure for the Total Access 1248 is a layered menu tree. Each layer of the menu tree is displayed as a menu or a screen.

Menu

A menu is a display that provides numbered selections that are used to navigate to related menus, modify provisioning information, or display information screens. A menu can contain the following objects:

• Menu Option: A menu option is indicated by a number, which when selected navigates the display to another menu layer or is used to change the option setting.

• Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the Total Access 1248.

• Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified.

• Hot Key: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function

(see Table 5-2

). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description

(i.e., S - Select Port).

Screen

A screen is a display that usually indicates the end of a menu tree path. A screen can contain the following objects:

• Read-only Field: A read-only field displays information that cannot be changed. The information displayed in a read-only field can be static or can be automatically updated by the Total Access 1248.

• Read-write Field: A read-write field displays information that when selected can be modified.

• Hot Key: A hot key is a key or combination of keys that are assigned to a function

(see Table 5-2

). Hot keys are indicated by the required key(s) and a brief description

(i.e., S - Select Port).

5-4 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Navigation

MENU NAVIGATION

Basic menu navigation is accomplished by selecting the desired option number and then pressing E NTER

. To return to the previous menu, press the E SC

(escape) key. To access the

System Help screen, press the question mark ( ?

) key, and press E NTER

.

Hot Keys

Table 5-1 shows the general keyboard commands, and Table 5-2

shows the menu specific hot keys for the Total Access 1248 system.

Keyboard Command

B

ACKSPACE

E

NTER

(or Return)

C

TRL

+R (Control and r)

E

SC

(Escape)

Spacebar

Table 5-1. General Keyboard Commands

Description

This keyboard command is used to delete the character to the left of the cursor during keyboard input.

This keyboard command is used to terminate input.

This keyboard command is used to refresh the display.

This keyboard command is used to return to the previous menu.

This keyboard command is used to toggle the setting choices for a text field.

Table 5-2. Menu Specific Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

PVC/PVP Management

C

This hot key displays the “Create a New PVC/PVP Screen” on page 5-21.

D

M

This hot key displays the “Delete an Existing PVC/PVP Screen” on page 5-23.

This hot key displays the “Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen” on page 5-24.

N

O

P

Q

This hot key is used to display the next PVC/PVP page.

This hot key displays the “Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu” on page 5-26.

This hot key is used to display the previous PVC/PVP page.

This hot key displays the “ATM Quick Provisioning Menu” on page 5-33.

V

This hot key displays the “Current ATM PVC Performance Menu” on page 5-31.

ATM Performance Monitoring Status

B

C

F

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

61179641AL1-5C 5-5

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-2. Menu Specific Hot Keys (Continued)

Hot Key Description

P

N

C

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

S This hot key is used to select a specific port.

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status

This hot key clears all the status information from the menu and updates the

Status Information Cleared: field with the date and time that the action occurred.

This hot key is available in all AUC modes.

R

S

This hot key initiates a retrieve of the configuration file from the file server. This hot key is available in the Auto and Manual AUC modes.

This hot key starts the upgrade process. This hot key is available in the Manual

AUC mode.

T1 Performance Monitoring Status

B

C

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

F

N

P

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

S This hot key is used to select a specific port.

E1 Performance Monitoring Status

B

C

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

F

N

P

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

S This hot key is used to select a specific port.

IMA Group Performance Monitoring Status

B

C

F

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

5-6 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Navigation

Table 5-2. Menu Specific Hot Keys (Continued)

Hot Key Description

IMA Performance Monitoring Status (Facilities)

B

C

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

F

N

P

S

T

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

This hot key is used to toggle between the Near End and Far End performance monitoring data.

ADSL Profile *

C

D

E

N

B

C

This hot key is used to create a new profile.

This hot key is used to delete a specified profile.

This hot key is used to modify a specified profile.

This hot key is used to display the next profile screen.

P

S

This hot key is used to display the previous profile screen.

This hot key is used to display a specific page.

V This hot key is used to display a specified profile.

Performance Monitoring

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

F

N

P

N

P

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

S

T

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

This hot key is used to view upstream/downstream Performance Monitoring data.

ADSL Retrain Criteria

C This hot key resets all retrain counts to zero.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

61179641AL1-5C 5-7

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-2. Menu Specific Hot Keys (Continued)

Hot Key Description

S This hot key is used to select a specific port.

Performance Monitoring Status

B

C

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

F

N

P

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

S

T

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

This hot key is used to view upstream/downstream Performance Monitoring data.

System Alarm Log

A This hot key is used to acknowledge all alarms.

C

F

L

N

This hot key is used to clear all acknowledged alarms.

This hot key is used to display the first page of alarms.

This hot key is used to display the last page of alarms.

This hot key is used to display the next page of alarms.

P

R

This hot key is used to display the previous page of alarms.

This hot key is used to reset all alarms.

T This hot key is used to display alarms in time ascending or descending order.

System Event Log

A

D

F

G

L

N

O

P

S

This hot key is used to display all events.

This hot key is used to display date/time events.

This hot key is used to display the first page of events.

This hot key is used to display login events.

This hot key is used to display the last page of events.

This hot key is used to display the next page of events.

This hot key is used to display account events.

This hot key is used to display the previous page of events.

This hot key is used to display software update events.

5-8 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Tree

Table 5-2. Menu Specific Hot Keys (Continued)

Hot Key Description

T

V

This hot key is used to display events in time ascending/descending order.

This hot key is used to toggle between displaying the connection method and associated user name for each event, or the IP address for each event.

Y This hot key is used to display security events.

* After creating a profile, provisioning is not updated until the profile changes from Inactive to Active. To unassign ports on a profile, simply change the state to Inactive and change the ports to “0” and this removes them.

MENU TREE

There are a number of menu screens designed to aid in the maintenance and troubleshooting of the Total Access 1248 system. A menu tree is a visual map that can be used to locate configuration information and provisioning options. The menu trees for the Total Access 1248 are listed below and can be found on the indicated pages:

Total Access 1248 Main Menu Tree , Figure 5-3 on page 5-10

System Management Menu Tree , Figure 5-4 on page 5-11

Network Port Menu Tree , Figure 5-5 on page 5-13

DSL Menu Tree , Figure 5-6 on page 5-14

61179641AL1-5C 5-9

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Total Access 1248

1. Configuration

2. ATM Circuit Management

Unit Name

CLEI Code

Part Number

Serial Number

Product Revision

Software Revision

1. ATM PVC/PVP Management

2. ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults

3. Restore ATM Defaults

4. ATM Performance

5. ATM OAM Settings

1. Change ATM Port Number

2. ATM Performance Data

3. ATM Port Cell Count Summary

4. Clear all PM for all Ports

1. DSLAM OAM Loopback Location ID

2. DSLAM OAM State

3. Inband OAM Loopback Test

1. Remote OAM Loopback Location ID

2. Type of OAM Loopback Cell

3. Send Loopback Cell

4. Reset Loopback Statistics

5. Reset All Statistics

3. System Management

A

4. Network Port

C

5. DSL Menus

D

6. System Alarms

7. System Event Log

8. Contact Information

9. Enter TL1 Mode

10. Logoff

Figure 5-3. Total Access 1248 Main Menu Tree

5-10 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Tree

A

B

1. Password Control

2. IP Address

3. Test IP Address

4. Time/Date

5. Baud Rate

6. TFTP Configuration

Upload/Download

1. Set Passwords

2. Allow SNMP Security Management

3. Set Menus Idle Logout Time

4. Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout Time

5. Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout Time

6. Restore Default Passwords

IP Feed

2. Mode

3. Configure IP

1. IP Address

2. Ping Timeout

3. Number of Pings

4. Start Ping

5. Start Traceroute

1. Adjust Time

2. Adjust Date

1. 9600

2. 19200

3. 38400

TFTP Server

TFTP Function

TFTP Filename

Error Status

Update Progress

1. RFC1483 Routed

2. IP over Ethernet

3. RFC1483 Bridged

1. Static

2. Dynamic

Static IP Settings for IP over ATM

1. IP Address

2. Subnet Mask

3. VPI/VCI

4. PCR

5. Default Gateway

6. TFTP IP Address

7. TL1 Port Number (Set > 1023)

8. TL1 IP Transport Type

9. Reset IP Factory Defaults

Mac Address

Encapsulation is via rfc1483 SNAP

Dynamic IP Settings for IP over ATM

Static IP Settings for IP over Ethernet

IP Address

Subnet Mask

3. VPI/VCI

4. PCR

Default Gateway

6. TFTP IP Address

7. TL1 Port Number (Set > 1023)

8. TL1 IP Transport Type

9. Reset IP Factory Defaults

Mac Address

Encapsulation is via rfc1483 SNAP

1. IP Address

2. Subnet Mask

3. Default Gateway

4. TFTP IP Address

5. TL1 Port Number (Set > 1023)

6. TL1 IP Transport Type

7. Reset IP Factory Defaults

Mac Address

Dynamic IP Settings for IP over Ethernet

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Default Gateway

4. TFTP IP Address

5. TL1 Port Number (Set > 1023)

6. TL1 IP Transport Type

7. Reset IP Factory Defaults

Mac Address

Figure 5-4. System Management Menu Tree

61179641AL1-5C 5-11

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

B

7. SNMP/TL1

8. Download New Code

1. Contact Information

2. Community Names

3. Trap Hosts

4. Traps Enabled

5. TL1 Target ID

1. Y-Modem

2. TFTP

1. Contact

2. Name

3. Location

1. Name

2. IP Address

3. Privileges

4. Name

5. IP Address

6. Pivileges

7. Name

8. IP Address

9. Privileges

1. IP Address

2. Version

3. IP Address

4. Version

5. IP Address

6. Version

7. Trap Port

1. Download Network Module Code

2. Exit

TFTP Server

TFTP Function

TFTP Filename

Error Status

Update Progress

9. Restore Factory Defaults

10. Reset System

11. Self Test Results

12. External Alarms

13. Expansion Menu

14. Modem Configuration

3. Auto Firmware Upgrade Provisioning

1. Restore

2. Exit

1. Reset

2. Exit

1. Run Fan Self Test

Fan #1 Test

Fan #2 Test

Fan #3 Test

Fan #4 Test

ROM Test

RAM Test

EEPROM Test

1. Alarm #1

2. Alarm #2

3. Alarm #3

4. Severity

5. Severity

6. Severity

7. Fan Alarm Delay

8. Restore External Alarm Defaults

1. Mode

2. Clear Packet Counts

1. Prompt User on call Received

2. Number of Rings

3. Caller ID Features

1. AUC Config File

2. AUC Mode

3. AUC Refresh Interval

4. AUC Upgrade Retries

5. AUC TFTP Server

6. AUC Base Path

1. Enabled

2. Disabled

1. Auto

2. Manual

3. Disable

System Uptime

1. Caller ID

2. Reject Calls with no Caller ID

3. Only Allow Specified Phone Numbers

4. Phone Numbers

Figure 5-4. System Management Menu Tree (Continued)

5-12 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Tree

C

1. T1/E1

2. IMA

3. Select T1/E1 Mode

1. T1/E1 Provisioning

1. Type (T1 only)

2. Framing (T1/E1)

3. Line Code (T1/E1)

2. T1/E1 Status

3. T1/E1 Performance

4. Test

5. Restore T1/E1 Factory Defaults

6. SNMP/Menu Loopback Detection

7. Inband Loopback Detection

8. FDL Loopback Detection

4. Line Build Out (T1 only)

1. T1/E1 PM

2. Clear All T1/E1 PM

1. Payload Loopback

2. Line Loopback

3. Local Loopback

4. No Loopback

5. Clear T1/E1 Loopbacks On All Ports

1. DSX

2. T1

1. ESF (E1 option FAS+CRC)

2. SF (E1 option FAS)

1. B8ZS (E1 option HDB3)

2. AMI (E1 option AMI)

DSX Type

1. 0-133 feet

2. 133-266 feet

3. 266-399 feet

4. 399-533 feet

5. 533-655 feet

T1 Type

1. 0 dB

2. -7.5 dB

3. -15 dB

4. -22.5 dB

1. IMA Configuration

IMA Firmware Revision

IMA Link Type

2. Provisioning

1. IMA Facility

2. IMA Group

3. Shortcut Setup

4. Scrambler

1. All Facilities Summary

2. Facility Operation Mode

Receive Group

Receive Link ID

Receive ATM Address

Transmit Group

Transmit Link ID

Transmit ATM Address

1. IMA_Group

2. Unassigned

3. Pass Thru

1. Group Operation Mode

IMA Transmit ID (0-255)

IMA TX Frame Length (32, 64, 128, 256)

Min. TX Active Links

Min. RX Active Links

Max Link Diff. Delay <0-100>

Group Version Version 1.1

1. In Service

2. Out of Service - Maintenance

3. Out of Service - Unassigned

1. Force All Facilities Into Unassigned

2. Force Facility - 1 Into Pass Through

3. Force All Facilities Into IMA Group 1

1. Enable

2. Disable

3. Status/Failure Monitoring

4. Test

5. Performance Monitoring Data

5. Restore Factory Defaults

1. Group FM Status

2. All Links FM Status

1. Data Lpbk Towards Network

2. ATM Lpbk Towards Network

3. ATM Lpbk Towards Customer

1. IMA Group PM

2. Facilities PM

3. Clear All IMA Links PM

1. Enable

2. Disable

1. Yes

2. No

1. T1

2. E1

Figure 5-5. Network Port Menu Tree

61179641AL1-5C 5-13

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

D

1. ADSL Provisioning

1. DSL Profiles

2. Alarm Profiles

3. Port Provisioning

1. Select Port

2. ADSL Card Service State

3. Line Service State

4. Service Mode

5. Hamband Mask

6. Cabinet Mode

1. In Service

2. Out of Service - Unassigned

3. Out of Service - Maintenance

1. In Service

2. Out of Service - Unassigned

3. Out of Service - Maintenance

1. Multimode (ADSL1, ADSL2, ADSL2+)

2. T1.413

3. G.dmt

4. G.lite

5. ADSL2

6. ADSL2.lite

7. ADSL2+

8. READSL

9. Legacy Multimode (ADSL1)

1. Enabled

2. Disabled

1. Disabled

2. Enabled (Tone 250)

3. Enabled (Tone 110)

4. Enabled (Tone 130)

1. Enabled

2. Disabled

7. Link Down Alarm

8. Ports to apply changes

9. Apply Provisioning to all Ports

1. ADSL Provisioning Restore

4. Restore ADSL Provisioning

2. ADSL Status

1. ADSL Status

2. All ADSL Ports Status

3. ATU-R Information

4. BAT/SNR Tables

3. ADSL Performance

1. Display PM for Current Port

2. Clear All PM for All Ports

4. DELT menus

1. Port

2. Activate DELT

3. Terminate Test

4. Test Data Filename

5. DELT TFTP Address

2. DSP Management Menu

1. Yes

2. No

Figure 5-6. DSL Menu Tree

1. Reset

2. Exit

1. Reset All DSPs and Reload

Firmware

2. Reset DSPs without reloading

Firmware

3. Auto Warm Start

4. Retrain Criteria

5. Exit

1. Reset

2. Exit

1. DSP:

2. Reset this DSP

3. Exit

1. Retrain Margin NE

2. Retrain Margin FE

3. Retrain UAS-LNE

4. Retrain UAS-LFE

5. Retrain SES-FE

5-14 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

MENU DESCRIPTIONS

Main Menu

Main Menu\

The Total Access 1248 Main menu (see

Figure 5-7 ) is the access point to all other operations.

The Main menu options have several functions and submenus that identify and provide access to specific operations and parameters.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Total Access 1248

1. Configuration

2. ATM Circuit Management

3. System Management

4. Network Port

5. DSL Menus

6. System Alarms

7. System Event Log

8. Contact Information

9. Enter TL1 mode

10. Logoff

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-7. Total Access 1248 Main Menu

The Total Access 1248 Main menu options are shown in Table 5-3 .

Table 5-3. Total Access 1248 Main Menu Options

Option Description

1 Configuration

2

3

4

5

6

ATM Circuit Management

System Management

Network Port

DSL Menus

System Alarms

Function

This option displays the “Configuration Screen” on page 5-17.

This option displays the “ATM Circuit Management

Menu” on page 5-18.

This option displays the “System Management Menu” on page 5-47.

This option displays the

“Network Port Menu” on page 5-

93.

This option displays the “DSL Menus” on page 5-138.

This option displays the “System Alarm Log Screen” on page 5-171.

61179641AL1-5C 5-15

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Option Description

7 System Event Log

8

9

10

Table 5-3. Total Access 1248 Main Menu Options (Continued)

Contact Information

Enter TL1 Mode

Logoff

Function

This option displays the “System Event Log Screen” on page 5-172.

This option displays the “Contact Information Screen” on page 5-174.

This option displays the “TL1 Mode Screen” on page 5-

175.

This option is used to end a Total Access 1248 menu session.

5-16 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Configuration Screen

Configuration

Main Menu \Configuration\

The Configuration screen (see

Figure 5-8 ) displays information about the system. For

instance, the CLEI Code and Part Number can be used to search for related information on the

ADTRAN web site or to order additional parts. The software revision may be required when calling the ADTRAN Technical Support.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Configuration

Host

Unit Name TA1248

CLEI Code VAMDA00ARA

Part Number 1179641AL1

Serial Number E46D0043

Product Revision H

Software Revision B03.06.01

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-8. Configuration Screen

The Configuration screen fields are shown in

Table 5-4 .

Field

Unit Name

CLEI Code

Part Number

Serial Number

Production Revision

Software Revision

Table 5-4. Configuration Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the unit name of the Total Access 1248.

This field displays the Common Language Equipment Identifier

(CLEI) code of the Total Access 1248.

This field displays the part number of the Total Access 1248.

This field displays the serial number of the Total Access 1248.

This field displays the current product revision of the Total

Access 1248.

This field displays the software revision of the Total Access

1248. This field updates automatically when a software download is completed.

61179641AL1-5C 5-17

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ATM Circuit Management Menu

ATM Circuit Management

Main Menu \ATM Circuit Management\

The ATM Circuit Management menu (see Figure 5-9 ) contains the steps used to provision and

maintain customer circuits. From this menu, a Permanent Virtual Circuit/Permanent Virtual

Path (PVC/PVP) for each ATM circuit can be viewed, created, or modified. PVCs are logical connections between ports that allow data to be sent from the network to a customer location.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ATM Circuit Management

1. ATM PVC/PVP Management

2. ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults

3. Restore ATM defaults

4. ATM Performance

5. ATM OAM Settings

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-9. ATM Circuit Management Menu

The ATM Circuit Management menu options are shown in Table 5-5 .

2

3

4

5

Table 5-5. ATM Circuit Management Menu Options

Option Description

1 ATM PVC/PVP Management

ATM Traffic Parameter

Defaults

Restore ATM defaults

ATM Performance

ATM OAM Settings

Function

This option displays the “PVC/PVP Management Menu” on page 5-19.

This option displays the

“ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults

Screen” on page 5-35.

This option displays the “Restore ATM Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-36.

This option displays the “ATM Performance Monitoring

Mode Menu” on page 5-38.

This option displays the “ATM OAM Settings Menu” on page 5-44.

5-18 61179641AL1-5C

PVC/PVP Management Menu

PVC/PVP Management

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \PVC/PVP Management\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-10

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the PVC/PVP

Management menu.

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (configured)

3. Client 2 (configured)

4. Client 3 (configured)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-10. Select Shelf Menu

The PVC/PVP Management menu (see Figure 5-11

) is used to create, modify, view, or delete

PVCs.

NOTE

If there are no current PVCs, the PVC/PVP Management menu only provides the create (

C

) hot key. In order to show all the available hot key choices on the PVC/PVP Management menu, one PVC has been created in

Figure 5-11 .

61179641AL1-5C 5-19

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Page 1 of 1 PVC/PVP Management - Shelf: Host PVCs: 1

Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2

Circuit ID Port VPI VCI <-> Port VPI VCI

1 Netw 35 1000 1 0 35

Circuit ID:

Select: Endpoint2 -> Endpoint1

Service PCR(0+1) Pkt Discard

1 UBR Best Effort Enabled

Endpoint 1: Port VPI VCI Endpoint 2: Port VPI VCI

0 35 1000 1 0 35

Enter # or arrow keys to pick circuit; space bar for choices or c,d,m,n,o,p,v,q

Figure 5-11. PVC/PVP Management Menu

The PVC/PVP Management hot keys are defined in

Table 5-9 .

N

O

Table 5-6. PVC/PVP Management Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

C Create a new PVC/PVP

D

M

P

Q

V

Delete a PVC/PVP

Modify a PVC/PVP

Display next PVC/PVP page

Display ATM OAM statistics

Display previous PVC/PVP page

Display quick provisioning menu

Display ATM PVC performance menu

Function

This hot key displays the

“Create a New PVC/PVP

Screen” on page 5-21.

This hot key displays the

“Delete an Existing PVC/PVP

Screen” on page 5-23.

This hot key displays the

“Modify an Existing PVC/PVP

Screen” on page 5-24.

This hot key is used to display the next PVC/PVP page.

This hot key displays the

“Current ATM OAM Statistics

Menu” on page 5-26.

This hot key is used to display the previous PVC/PVP page.

This hot key displays the

“ATM Quick Provisioning

Menu” on page 5-33.

This hot key displays the

“Current ATM PVC

Performance Menu” on page 5-31.

5-20 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Create a New PVC/PVP Screen

Create New PVC/PVP

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

PVC/PVP Management

\Create New PVC/PVP\

The Create a New PVC/PVP screen (see Figure 5-12 ) is used to create the PVC/PVPs for ADSL

connections. Each ADSL connection has at least one PVC/PVP per ATM circuit provisioned for data flow. PVC/PVPs map ATM circuits from the network to the ADSL ports.

Create a New PVC/PVP

Endpoint 1 (Net --> Cust) Endpoint 2 (Net <-- Cust)

Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI

Netw 35 1000 1 0 35

____________________________________________________________

Service Pkt Discard PCR

UBR Enabled Best Effort

Circuit ID

N/A

____________________________________________________________

When finished, place cursor here to select action:

Create new circuit and return to PVC/PVP Management

NOTE: No changes will take effect until an action is selected and executed.

To Select an action, place the cursor over the Action option and press the

Space Bar. To execute the action, press Enter.

Enter a VPI value between 0 an 4095.

Figure 5-12. Create a New PVC/PVP Screen

The Create a New PVC/PVP screen fields are shown in Table 5-7

.

Field

Endpoint 1 Port

Endpoint 1 VPI

Endpoint 1 VCI

Endpoint 2 Port

Endpoint 2 VPI

Endpoint 2 VCI

Table 5-7. Create a New PVC/PVP Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the network port.

This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier for the ATM port from the Network. Valid values range from 0 to 4095.

This field displays the Virtual Channel Identifier for the ATM port from the network. Valid values range from 0 to 65535.

This field displays the ATM port that is being created. Valid values range from 1 to 48.

This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier for the ATM port.

Valid values range from 0 to 4095.

This field displays the Virtual Channel Identifier for the ATM.

Valid values range from 0 to 65535.

61179641AL1-5C 5-21

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Service

UBR

CBR

• PCR

VBR-rt

• PCR

• SCR

• MBS

VBR-nrt

• PCR

• SCR

• MBS

Field

Service

Circuit ID

Pkt Discard

Table 5-7. Create a New PVC/PVP Screen Fields (Continued)

Description

This field identifies ATM Traffic Class. There are four service options (Traffic Descriptors) available for the Total Access 1248 system:

• UBR

• CBR

• VBR-rt

• VBR-nrt

The options available for each service and their descriptions are

shown in Table 5-8

.

This field displays the identifier given to a specific circuit. This is a user defined value.

This field displays the status of packet discard: Enabled or

Disabled.

Table 5-8. PVC/PVP Service Options

Description

Unspecified bit rate

Constant bit rate

• Peak Cell Rate

Variable bit rate real time

• Peak Cell Rate

• Sustained Cell Rate

• Maximum Burst Size

T1 Settings

0-14488

0-14488

0-14488

0-65535

Variable bit rate non-real time

• Peak Cell Rate

• Sustained Cell Rate

• Maximum Burst Size

0-14488

0-14488

0-65535

E1 Settings

0-19316

0-19316

0-19316

0-65535

0-19316

0-19316

0-65535

5-22 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Delete an Existing PVC/PVP Screen

Delete Existing PVC/PVP

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

PVC/PVP Management

\Delete Existing PVC/PVP

When the D hot key is selected to delete a PVC/PVP, a confirmation prompt at the bottom of the screen (see

Figure 5-13 ) displays.

Page 1 of 1 PVC/PVP Management - Shelf: Host PVCs: 1

Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2

Circuit ID Port VPI VCI <-> Port VPI VCI

1 Netw 35 1000 1 0 35

Circuit ID:

Select: Endpoint2 -> Endpoint1

Service PCR(0+1) Pkt Discard

1 UBR Best Effort Enabled

Endpoint 1: Port VPI VCI Endpoint 2: Port VPI VCI

0 35 1000 1 0 35

Delete this circuit (y/n)?

Figure 5-13. Delete an Existing PVC/PVP Screen

61179641AL1-5C 5-23

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen

Modify Existing PVC/PVP

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

PVC/PVP Management

\Modify Existing PVC/PVP\

The Modify an Existing PVC/PVP screen (see Figure 5-14

) is used to modify existing PVC/

PVPs.

Modify an Existing PVC/PVP

Endpoint 1 (Net --> Cust) Endpoint 2 (Net <-- Cust)

Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI

Netw 35 1000 1 0 35

____________________________________________________________

Service Pkt Discard PCR

UBR Enabled Best Effort

Circuit ID

N/A

____________________________________________________________

When finished, place cursor here to select action:

Modify existing circuit and return to PVC/PVP Management

NOTE: No changes will take effect until an action is selected and executed.

To Select an action, place the cursor over the Action option and press the

Space Bar. To execute the action, press Enter.

Enter a VPI value between 0 and 4095.

Figure 5-14. Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen

The Modify an Existing PVC/PVP screen fields are shown in Table 5-9

.

Field

Endpoint 1 Port

Endpoint 1 VPI

Endpoint 1 VCI

Endpoint 2 Port

Endpoint 2 VPI

Endpoint 2 VCI

Table 5-9. Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the network port.

This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier for the ATM port from the Network. Valid values range from 0 to 4095.

This field displays the Virtual Channel Identifier for the ATM port from the network. Valid values range from 0 to 65535.

This field displays the ATM port that is being created. Valid values range from 1 to 48.

This field displays the Virtual Path Identifier for the ATM port.

Valid values range from 0 to 4095.

This field displays the Virtual Channel Identifier for the ATM.

Valid values range from 0 to 65535.

5-24 61179641AL1-5C

Service

UBR

CBR

• PCR

VBR-rt

• PCR

• SCR

• MBS

VBR-nrt

• PCR

• SCR

• MBS

Field

Service

Circuit ID

Table 5-9. Modify an Existing PVC/PVP Screen Fields (Continued)

Pkt Discard

Description

This field identifies ATM Traffic Class. There are four service options (Traffic Descriptors) available for the Total Access 1248 system:

• UBR

• CBR

• VBR-rt

• VBR-nrt

The options available for each service and their descriptions are

shown in Table 5-10 .

This field displays the identifier given to a specific circuit. This is a user defined value.

This field displays the status of packet discard: Enabled or

Disabled.

Table 5-10. PVC/PVP Service Options

Description

Unspecified bit rate

Constant bit rate

• Peak Cell Rate

Variable bit rate real time

• Peak Cell Rate

• Sustained Cell Rate

• Maximum Burst Size

T1 Settings

0-14488

0-14488

0-14488

0-65535

Variable bit rate non-real time

• Peak Cell Rate

• Sustained Cell Rate

• Maximum Burst Size

0-14488

0-14488

0-65535

Menu Descriptions

E1 Settings

0-19316

0-19316

0-19316

0-65535

0-19316

0-19316

0-65535

61179641AL1-5C 5-25

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu

Current ATM OAM Statistics

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

PVC/PVP Management

\Current ATM OAM Statistics\

The Current ATM Operations and Maintenance (OAM) Statistics menu (see

Figure 5-15 )

displays the network and line side OAM information for each ATM circuit.

OAM is the group of network management functions that provide network fault indication and performance information.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Current ATM OAM Statistics

Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2 Modem Status

Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Down

0 35 1000 1 0 35

Endpoint 1 (Net --> Cust) Endpoint 2 (Net <-- Cust)

Rx OAM Cells : 0 Rx OAM Cells : 0

AIS State : FALSE AIS State : FALSE

RDI State : FALSE RDI State : FALSE

1. OAM Loopback Test Screen

2. Clear Current PVC OAM Stats

3. Clear All PVC OAM Stats

Selection :

'N' - Next PVC 'P' - Previous PVC 'S' - Select PVC

Figure 5-15. Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu

The Current ATM OAM Statistics menu options are shown in Table 5-11

.

Table 5-11. Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu Options

Option

1

2

3

Description

OAM Loopback Test Screen

Function

This option displays the “OAM Loopback Test Menu” on page 5-28.

Clear Current PVC OAM Stats This option clears the currently displayed PVC OAM statistics.

Clear All PVC OAM Stats This option clears all PVCs OAM statistics.

5-26 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

The Current ATM OAM Statistics menu fields are shown in Table 5-12

.

Field

Endpoint 1

Rx OAM Cells

AIS State

RDI State

Endpoint 2

Rx OAM Cells

AIS State

RDI State

Table 5-12. Current ATM OAM Statistics Menu Fields

Description

This field displays the total number of received OAM cells for

Endpoint 1.

This field indicates if the Endpoint is in AIS state (True) or not

(False).

This field indicates if the Endpoint is in the RDI state (True) or not (False).

This field displays the total number of received OAM cells for

Endpoint 2.

This field indicates if the Endpoint is in AIS state (True) or not

(False).

This field indicates if the Endpoint is in the RDI state (True) or not (False).

61179641AL1-5C 5-27

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

OAM Loopback Test Menu

OAM Loopback Test

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

PVC/PVP Management

\

Current ATM OAM Statistics \OAM Loopback Test\

The OAM Loopback Test menu (see Figure 5-16

) displays the network and line side information for each ATM circuit.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

OAM Loopback Test

Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2 Modem Status

Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Down

0 35 1000 1 0 35

Endpoint 1 (Net --> Cust) Endpoint 2 (Net <-- Cust)

Tx Loopback Request : 0 Tx Loopback Request : 0

Rx Loopback Request : 0 Rx Loopback Request : 0

Tx Loopback Response : 0 Tx Loopback Response : 0

Rx Loopback Response : 0 Rx Loopback Response : 0

Loopback Passed : 0 Loopback Passed : 0

Loopback Failed : 0 Loopback Failed : 0

1. Endpoint 1 Remote OAM Loopback Location ID : FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

2. Endpoint 2 Remote OAM Loopback Location ID : FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

3. Type of OAM Loopback Cell : Segment

4. Send from Endpoint 1 to Network

5. Send from Endpoint 2 to Customer

6. Reset Loopback Statistics

Selection :

Figure 5-16. OAM Loopback Test Menu

The OAM Loopback Test menu options are shown in

Table 5-13 .

Table 5-13. OAM Loopback Test Menu Options

Option Description

1 Endpoint 1 Remote OAM

Loopback Location ID

2

3

Endpoint 2 Remote OAM

Loopback Location ID

Type of OAM Loopback Cell

Function

This option is used to enter the Endpoint 1 remote loopback location ID. The remote loopback location ID is in hexadecimal 16 byte format.

This option is used to enter the Endpoint 2 remote loopback location ID. The remote loopback location ID is in hexadecimal 16 byte format.

This option is used to specify the type of OAM Loopback cell. Options include the following:

• Segment

• End-to-End

5-28 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Table 5-13. OAM Loopback Test Menu Options (Continued)

Option Description

4

5

6

Send from Endpoint 1 to

Network

Send from Endpoint 2 to

Customer

Reset Loopback Statistics

Function

This option is used to initiate a loopback from Endpoint

1 to the network.

This option is used to initiate a loopback from Endpoint

2 to the customer.

This option clears the loopback statistics for this circuit.

The OAM Loopback Test menu fields are shown in

Table 5-14 .

Table 5-14. OAM Loopback Test Menu Fields

Field

Endpoint 1

Port

VPI

VCI

Endpoint 2

Port

VPI

VCI

Endpoint 1 (Net --> Cust)

Tx Loopback Request

Description

This field displays the physical port.

This field displays the VPI for Endpoint 1.

This field displays the VCI for Endpoint 1.

This field displays the physical port.

This field displays the VPI for Endpoint 2.

This field displays the VCI for Endpoint 2.

Rx Loopback Request

Tx Loopback Response

Rx Loopback Response

Loopback Passed

Loopback Failed

This field displays the total number of transmitted loopback requests.

This field displays the total number of received loopback requests.

This field displays the total number of transmitted loopback responses.

This field displays the total number of received loopback responses.

This field displays the total number of loopback request that passed.

This field displays the total number of loopback request that failed.

Endpoint 2 (Net <-- Cust)

Tx Loopback Request

Rx Loopback Request

This field displays the total number of transmitted loopback requests.

This field displays the total number of received loopback requests.

61179641AL1-5C 5-29

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Modem Status

Table 5-14. OAM Loopback Test Menu Fields (Continued)

Field

Tx Loopback Response

Rx Loopback Response

Loopback Passed

Loopback Failed

Description

This field displays the total number of transmitted loopback responses.

This field displays the total number of received loopback responses.

This field displays the total number of loopback request that passed.

This field displays the total number of loopback request that failed.

This field displays the modem status.

5-30 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Current ATM PVC Performance Menu

Current ATM PVC Performance

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

PVC/PVP Management

\Current ATM PVC Performance\

The Current ATM PVC Performance menu (see Figure 5-17

) displays the network and port side information for each ATM circuit.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Current ATM PVC Performance

Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2 Modem Status

Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI Down

0 35 1000 1 0 35

Endpoint 1 (Net --> Cust) Endpoint 2 (Net <-- Cust)

Tx Cells : 0 Tx Cells : 0

Discarded Queue Full : 0 Discarded Queue Full : 0

Cells/Sec (Last Sec) : 0 Cells/Sec (Last Sec) : 0

Cells/Sec (60 Sec Avg): 0 Cells/Sec (60 Sec Avg): 0

1. Clear Current PVC PM

2. Clear All PVC PM

Selection :

'N' - Next PVC 'P' - Previous PVC 'S' - Select PVC

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-17. Current ATM PVC Performance Menu

The Current ATM PVC Performance menu options are shown in

Table 5-15

.

Option Description

1 Clear Current PVC PM

2

Table 5-15. Current ATM PVC Performance Menu Options

Clear All PVC PM

Function

This option clears the currently displayed PVC performance monitoring statistics.

This option clears all the PVCs performance monitoring statistics.

61179641AL1-5C 5-31

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

The Current ATM PVC Performance menu fields are shown in

Table 5-16 .

Table 5-16. Current ATM Port Performance Menu Fields

Field

Endpoint 1 (Net --> Cust)

Tx Cells

Description

Discarded Queue Full

Cells/Sec (Last Sec)

Cells/Sec (60 Sec Avg)

This field displays the total number of transmit cells for

Endpoint 1 for the current performance period.

This field displays the number of cells discarded for Endpoint 1 because of a full queue.

This field displays the number of cells transmitted per second for Endpoint 1.

This field displays the average number of cells transmitted every

60 seconds for Endpoint 1.

Endpoint 2 (Net <-- Cust)

Tx Cells

Discarded Queue Full

Cells/Sec (Last Sec)

Cells/Sec (60 Sec Avg)

This field displays the total number of received cells for

Endpoint 2 for the current performance period.

This field displays the number of cells discarded because of a full queue.

This field displays the number of cells received per second for

Endpoint 2.

This field displays the average number of cells received every 60 seconds for Endpoint 2.

5-32 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

ATM Quick Provisioning Menu

ATM Quick Provisioning

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

PVC/PVP Management

\ATM Quick Provisioning\

The ATM Quick Provisioning menu (see Figure 5-18

) is used to quickly create ATM circuits based on reference circuits.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ATM Quick Provisioning

Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2

Port VPI VCI Port VPI VCI

Netw 35 1000 1 0 35

Type Pkt Discard PCR

UBR Enabled Best Effort

1. Increment Endpoint 1 VPI? NO

2. Increment Endpoint 1 VCI? YES

3. Increment Endpoint 2 Port? YES

4. Increment Endpoint 2 VPI? NO

5. Increment Endpoint 2 VCI? NO

6. Number of Circuits to Create: 47

7. Create New ATM Circuits.

Selection :

This screen allows quick creation of ATM circuits based on the reference circuit

above. All the highlighted attributes will increment by one 47 times.

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-18. ATM Quick Provisioning Menu

The ATM Quick Provisioning menu options are described in Table 5-17

. Note that options are dependent on each other.

Table 5-17. ATM Quick Provisioning Menu Options

Option Description

1

2

3

Increment Endpoint 1 VPI

Increment Endpoint 1 VCI

Increment Endpoint 2 Port

4

5

6

7

Increment Endpoint 2 VPI

Increment Endpoint 2 VCI

Number of Circuits to Create

Create New ATM Circuits

Function

This option increments the Endpoint 1 VPI value by one.

This option increments the Endpoint 1 VCI value by one.

This option increments the Endpoint 2 Port value by one.

This option increments the Endpoint 2 VPI value by one.

This option increments the Endpoint 2 VCI value by one.

This option is used to indicate the number of circuits to be created.

This option is used to create the new ATM circuit.

61179641AL1-5C 5-33

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Figure 5-19 shows the ATM PVC/PVP Management menu after creating new ATM circuits

using the ATM Quick Provisioning menu with the settings shown in Figure 5-18

.

Page 1 of 5 PVC/PVP Management - Shelf: Host PVCs: 48

Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2

Circuit ID Port VPI VCI <-> Port VPI VCI

1 Netw 35 1000 1 0 35

2 Netw 35 1001 2 0 35

3 Netw 35 1002 3 0 35

4 Netw 35 1003 4 0 35

5 Netw 35 1004 5 0 35

6 Netw 35 1005 6 0 35

7 Netw 35 1006 7 0 35

8 Netw 35 1007 8 0 35

9 Netw 35 1008 9 0 35

10 Netw 35 1009 10 0 35

11 Netw 35 1010 11 0 35

12 Netw 35 1011 12 0 35

Circuit ID:

Select: Endpoint2 -> Endpoint1

Service PCR(0+1) Pkt Discard

3 UBR Best Effort Enabled

Endpoint 1: Port VPI VCI Endpoint 2: Port VPI VCI

0 35 1002 3 0 35

Enter # or arrow keys to pick circuit; space bar for choices or c,d,m,n,o,p,v,q

Figure 5-19. ATM PVC/PVP Management Menu with 48 PVCs

5-34 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults Screen

ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults

The ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults screen (see

Figure 5-20 ) displays the system defaults for

the ATM circuits. Traffic parameters represent priorities given to ATM cell transmissions.

Once traffic parameters are set from this screen, all PVC/PVPs provisioned from that point forward will use these parameter defaults.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults

Endpoint 2 -> Endpoint 1

Traffic Type PCR(0+1) SCR(0+1) MCR(0+1) MBS(0+1)

UBR Best Effort N/A N/A N/A

CBR 0 N/A N/A N/A

VBR-rt 0 0 N/A 0

VBR-nrt 0 0 N/A 0

Traffic Type Pkt Discard

UBR Enabled

CBR Enabled

VBR-rt Enabled

VBR-nrt Enabled

Note: This screen allows modification of the DEFAULT traffic parameter settings,

which can be overridden on a per PVC/PVP basis in the PVC/PVP Management menu.

Figure 5-20. ATM Traffic Parameter Defaults Screen

The ATM Traffic Parameters Defaults screen Traffic Types are shown in

Table 5-18 .

Traffic Type

PCR

SCR

MCR

MBS

Table 5-18. ATM Parameters Defaults Screen Traffic Types

Definition

The Peak Cell Rate designates an upper limit that the traffic information rate cannot exceed.

The Sustainable Cell Rate specifies the average traffic rate that is transmitted and received.

The Minimum Cell Rate designates a minimum limit that the traffic information rate cannot fall below.

The Maximum Burst Size specifies the maximum number of cells per second (CPS) that can be transmitted at the PCR.

61179641AL1-5C 5-35

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Restore ATM Factory Defaults Menu

Restore ATM Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \Restore ATM Factory Defaults\

The Total Access 1248 provisioning system provides the ability to restore the ATM parameters

to the factory defaults. Figure 5-21

displays the Restore ATM Factory Defaults menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore ATM Factory Defaults

WARNING! THIS IS SERVICE AFFECTING!

This is for defaulting the ATM parameters only. This

will delete all of the selected PVCs and reset the

traffic descriptors to their default values.

1. Delete All PVCs and Restore Default Settings

2. Delete Host PVCs

3. Delete Client 1 PVCs

4. Delete Client 2 PVCs

5. Delete Client 3 PVCs

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-21. Restore ATM Factory Defaults Menu

CAUTION

This action is service affecting. All traffic descriptors and PVCs are removed.

The Restore ATM Factory Defaults menu options are shown in Table 5-19

.

5-36 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Option Description

1 Delete All PVCs and Restore

Default Settings

2 Delete Host PVCs

3

4

5

Table 5-19. Restore ATM Factory Defaults Menu Options

Delete Client 1 PVCs

Delete Client 2 PVCs

Delete Client 3 PVCs

Function

This option deletes all PVCs and restores ATM factory defaults without additional prompting.

This option deletes Host PVCs without additional prompting.

This option deletes Client 1 PVCs without additional prompting, if enabled.

This option deletes Client 2 PVCs without additional prompting, if enabled.

This option deletes Client 3 PVCs without additional prompting, if enabled.

61179641AL1-5C 5-37

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode Menu

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \ATM Performance Monitoring Mode\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-22

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the ATM

Performance Monitoring Mode menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (configured)

3. Client 2 (configured)

4. Client 3 (configured)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-22. Select Shelf Menu

The Total Access 1248 tracks performance statistics for ATM ports via the ATM Performance

Monitoring Mode menu (see

Figure 5-23 ).

5-38 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode

Port: Network

1. Change ATM Port Number Network

2. ATM Performance Data

3. ATM Port Cell Count Summary

4. Clear All PM for All Ports

Selection :

This screen allows you to view the ATM stats for a particular port.

Enter 0 for the network port or 1 - 48 for the customer ports.

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-23. ATM Performance Monitoring Mode Menu

The ATM Performance Monitoring Mode menu options are shown in

Table 5-20 .

Table 5-20. ATM Performance Monitoring Mode Menu Options

Option Description

1 Change ATM Port Number

2

3

4

ATM Performance Data

ATM Port Cell Count

Summary

Clear All PM for All Ports

Function

This option is used to change the ATM port number without additional prompting. The current port number is displayed above the menu items on the ATM

Performance Monitoring Mode menu.

This option displays the “ATM Performance Monitoring

Status Screen” on page 5-40.

This option displays the

“ATM Port Cell Count Summary

Screen” on page 5-42.

This option displays the “Clear All PM for All Ports

Menu” on page 5-43.

61179641AL1-5C 5-39

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ATM Performance Monitoring Status Screen

ATM Performance Monitoring Status

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode \ATM Performance Monitoring Status\

The ATM Performance Monitoring Status screen (see

Figure 5-24

) displays the port performance for the port selected. This menu lists the cell transmitted to the Network, cells transmitted to the customer, discarded cells, and the HEC Error count for the selected performance period.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ATM Performance Monitoring Status

Shelf: HOST Port: Network

TX (to net) TX (to cust) Discarded Cells HEC Error Cnt

24 Hr - Current 0 0 0 0

MM/DD 0 0 0 0

Avg CPS (60s) 0 0

Current CPS 0 0

15 Min - Current 0 0 0 0

16:15 0 0 0 0

16:00 0 0 0 0

15:45 0 0 0 0

15:30 0 0 0 0

15:15 0 0 0 0

15:00 0 0 0 0

14:45 0 0 0 0

14:30 0 0 0 0

B - Backward(2hrs/15min PM)

S - Select Port P - Previous Port N - Next Port C - Clear PM Status

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-24. ATM Performance Monitoring Status Screen

The ATM Performance Monitoring Status screen options are shown in

Table 5-21 .

Field

Port

TX (to net)

RX (to cust)

Table 5-21. ATM Performance Monitoring Status Screen Fields

Discarded Cells

HEC Error Cnt

Description

This field displays the port number for the cell count summary.

This field displays the number of cells transmitted to the network.

This field displays the number of cells received from the network and transmitted to the customer.

This field displays the number of discarded cells.

This field displays the HEC errors, which are Cyclical

Redundancy Check (CRC) errors in the last byte of the ATM cell header used for checking integrity.

The ATM Performance Monitoring Status hot keys are defined in

Table 5-22 .

5-40 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

C

F

P

N

S

Table 5-22. ATM Performance Monitoring Status Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

B Backward (2hrs/15min PM)

Clear PM Status

Forward (2hrs/15min PM)

Previous Port

Next Port

Select Port

Function

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

61179641AL1-5C 5-41

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ATM Port Cell Count Summary Screen

ATM Port Cell Count Summary

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode \ATM Port Cell Count Summary\

The ATM Port Cell Count Summary screen (see

Figure 5-25

) displays a summary of cell counts for all ports simultaneously.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ATM Port Cell Count Summary

Port Tx Rx Disc. Port Tx Rx Disc.

1 0 0 0 13 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 14 0 0 0

3 0 0 0 15 0 0 0

4 0 0 0 16 0 0 0

5 0 0 0 17 0 0 0

6 0 0 0 18 0 0 0

7 0 0 0 19 0 0 0

8 0 0 0 20 0 0 0

9 0 0 0 21 0 0 0

10 0 0 0 22 0 0 0

11 0 0 0 23 0 0 0

12 0 0 0 24 0 0 0

NOTE: Tx is to network, Rx is to customer, Disc. is discarded cells

Highlighted Port indicates the ADSL loop is trained.

'N' - Next Page

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-25. ATM Port Cell Count Summary Screen

Field

Port

Tx

Rx

Disc.

The ATM Port Cell Count Summary screen fields are shown in

Table 5-23 .

Table 5-23. ATM Port Cell Count Summary Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the port number for the cell count summary.

This field displays the number of cells transmitted to the network.

This field displays the number of cells received from the network and transmitted to the customer.

This field displays the number of discarded cells.

5-42 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Clear All PM for All Ports Menu

Clear All PM for All Ports

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode \Clear All PM for All Ports\

The Clear All PM for All Ports option is selected from the

ATM Performance Monitoring Mode

Menu .

The Clear All PM for All Ports menu options are shown in Table 5-24

.

2 No

Table 5-24. Clear All PM for All Ports Menu Options

Option Description

1 Yes

Function

This option clears the performance monitoring data for all of the ports.

This option returns the display to the “ATM Performance

Monitoring Mode Menu” on page 5-38 and does not clear

the performance monitoring data.

61179641AL1-5C 5-43

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ATM OAM Settings Menu

ATM OAM Settings

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \ATM OAM Settings\

The ATM OAM Settings menu (see Figure 5-26

) is used to provision the Total Access 1248

OAM settings and to test the Inband channel PVC for an ATM fed system.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ATM OAM Settings

1. DSLAM OAM Loopback Location ID : FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

2. DSLAM OAM State : Disabled

3. Inband OAM Loopback Test

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-26. ATM OAM Settings Menu

The ATM OAM Settings menu options are shown in

Table 5-25 .

Table 5-25. ATM OAM Settings Menu Options

Option Description

1 DSLAM OAM Loopback

Location ID

2

3

DSLAM OAM State

Inband OAM Loopback Test

Function

This is option is used to enter the loopback location ID for the Total Access 1248. The remote loopback location

ID is in hexadecimal 16 byte format.

This option is used to toggle the Total Access 1248 OAM state between Disabled and Enabled.

This option displays the “Inband OAM Loopback Test

Menu” on page 5-45.

5-44 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu

Inband OAM Loopback Test

Main Menu \

ATM Circuit Management \

ATM OAM Settings \Inband OAM Loopback Test\

The Inband OAM Loopback Test menu (see Figure 5-27 ) is used to provision the Total Access

1248 OAM Loopback settings and to test the Inband channel PVC for an ATM fed box.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Inband OAM Loopback Test

Port VPI VCI

0 0 32

Tx Loopback Request : 0 Rx OAM Cells : 0

Rx Loopback Request : 0 AIS State : FALSE

Tx Loopback Response : 0 RDI State : FALSE

Rx Loopback Response : 0

Loopback Passed : 0

Loopback Failed : 0

1. Remote OAM Loopback Location ID : FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

2. Type of OAM Loopback Cell : Segment

3. Send Loopback Cell

4. Reset Loopback Statistics

5. Reset All Statistics

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-27. Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu

The Inband OAM Loopback Test menu options are shown in Table 5-26

.

Option Description

1 Remote OAM Loopback

Location ID

2

3

4

5

Table 5-26. Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu Options

Type of OAM Loopback Cell

Send Loopback Cell

Reset Loopback Statistics

Reset All Statistics

Function

This is option is used to enter the remote loopback location ID. The remote loopback location ID is in hexadecimal 16 byte format.

This option is used to specify the type of OAM Loopback cell. Options include the following:

• Segment

• End-to-End

This option is used to send a loopback cell.

This option clears the OAM loopback statistics for this circuit.

This option clears all OAM loopback statistics.

61179641AL1-5C 5-45

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

The Inband OAM Loopback Test menu fields are shown in Table 5-27

.

Loopback Passed

Loopback Failed

Rx OAM Cells

AIS State

RDI State

Table 5-27. Inband OAM Loopback Test Menu Fields

Field

Port

VPI

VCI

Tx Loopback Request

Rx Loopback Request

Tx Loopback Response

Rx Loopback Response

Description

This field displays the physical port.

This field displays the VPI for the circuit.

This field displays the VCI for the circuit.

This field displays the total number of transmitted loopback requests.

This field displays the total number of received loopback requests.

This field displays the total number of transmitted loopback responses.

This field displays the total number of received loopback responses.

This field displays the total number of loopback request that passed.

This field displays the total number of loopback request that failed.

This field displays the total number of received OAM cells.

This field indicates if the Endpoint is in AIS state (True) or not

(False).

This field indicates if the Endpoint is in the RDI state (True) or not (False).

5-46 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

System Management Menu

System Management

Main Menu \System Management\

The System Management menu (see Figure 5-28

) is used to manage system settings. The following subsections describe these settings in detail.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

System Management

1. Password Control

2. IP Address

3. Test IP Address

4. Time/Date

5. Baud Rate

6. TFTP Configuration Upload/Download

7. SNMP/TL1

8. Download New Code

9. Restore Factory Defaults

10. Reset System

11. Self Test Results

12. External Alarms

13. Expansion Menu

14. Modem Configuration

System Uptime: 2 hrs 33 mins 44 secs

Selection : '?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-28. System Management Menu

The System Management menu options are shown in Table 5-28

.

Table 5-28. System Management Menu Options

Option Description

1 Password Control

2

3

4

5

6

IP Address

Test IP Address

Time/Date

Baud Rate

TFTP Configuration Upload/

Download

Function

This option displays the “Password Control Menu” on page 5-49.

This option displays the

“Mode Selection and Current IP

Settings Menu” on page 5-52.

This option displays the “Test IP Address Menu” on page 5-66.

This option displays the “Time/Date Adjust Menu” on page 5-67.

This option displays the “Current Baud Rate Menu” on page 5-68.

This option displays the “TFTP Configuration Storage/

Retrieval Screen” on page 5-69.

61179641AL1-5C 5-47

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Option Description

7 SNMP/TL1

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

N/A

Table 5-28. System Management Menu Options (Continued)

Download New Code

Restore Factory Defaults

Reset System

Self Test Results

External Alarms

Expansion Menu

Modem Configuration

System Uptime

Function

This option displays the “SNMP/TL1 Configuration

Menu” on page 5-71.

This option displays the

“Code Download Method Menu” on page 5-77.

This option displays the “Restore Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-84.

This option displays the “Reset System Menu” on page 5-85.

This option displays the “Self Test Menu” on page 5-86.

This option displays the “External Alarms Menu” on page 5-88.

This option displays the “Expansion Menu” on page 5-

90.

This option displays the “Modem Configuration Menu” on page 5-91

This field displays the length of time the Total Access

1248 system has been running. Each time the system is reset, this value resets to 0 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes, and 0 seconds.

5-48 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Password Control Menu

Password Control

Main Menu \

System Management

\Password Control\

The Password Control menu (see Figure 5-29

) is used to set and modify passwords, logout times, and restore default passwords. The system provides up to eleven user accounts.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Password Control

1. Set Passwords None Configured

2. Allow SNMP security management Disabled

3. Set Menus Idle Logout Time 10 minutes

4. Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout Time 30 minutes

5. Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout Time 120 minutes

6. Restore Default Passwords

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-29. Password Control Menu

The Password Control menu options are shown in Table 5-29

.

Table 5-29. Password Control Menu Options

Option Description

1 Set Passwords

2

3

4

5

6

Allow SNMP Security

Management

Set Menus Idle Logout Time

Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout

Time

Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout

Time

Restore Default Passwords

Function

This option displays the “Password Control Levels

Screen” on page 5-50.

This option displays the “Allow SNMP Security

Management” on page 5-51.

This option displays the “Set Menus Idle Logout Time” on page 5-51.\

This option displays the “Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout

Time” on page 5-51.

This option displays the “Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout

Time” on page 5-51.

This option displays the “Restore Default Passwords” on page 5-51.

61179641AL1-5C 5-49

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Password Control Levels Screen

Password Control Levels

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Password Control \Password Control Levels\

The Password Control Levels screen (see

Figure 5-30 ) is used to manage the usernames and

associated passwords that access the system.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Password Control Levels

Username Password Access Level Status

READONLY Read Only Active-Default

READWRITE Technician Active-Default

ADMIN System Administrator Active-Default

Read Only Active

Read Only Inactive

Read Only Inactive

Read Only Inactive

Read Only Inactive

Read Only Inactive

Read Only Inactive

Read Only Inactive

Press space bar to change Status

Figure 5-30. Password Control Levels Screen

The password control levels for the default usernames are shown in Table 5-30

.

Username

ADMIN

READWRITE

READONLY

Table 5-30. Password Control Levels for Default Usernames

Access Level

System Administrator

Technician

Read only

Control Level

Read/Write and password control

Read/Write

Read only

To set or change a username or password, perform the following steps:

1. Navigate to a Username field with the arrow keys.

The Username field displays in reverse video.

2. Press the spacebar to open the field, type a username, and press E NTER

.

3. Press the T AB

key to navigate to the Password field.

The Password field displays in reverse video.

4. Press the spacebar to open the field, type a password, and press E NTER .

5-50 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

5. Enter the password again when prompted to verify, and press E NTER

.

6. Press the T AB

key to navigate to the Access Level field.

The Access Level field displays in reverse video.

7. Press the spacebar to change the access level, and press E NTER

.

8. Press the T AB

key to navigate to the Status field.

The Status field displays in reverse video.

9. Press the spacebar to change the status, and press E NTER

.

Allow SNMP Security Management

Allow SNMP Security Management

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Password Control \Allow SNMP Security Management\

The Allow SNMP Security Management option can be toggled to either Enabled or Disabled.

Set Menus Idle Logout Time

Set Menus Idle Logout Time

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Password Control \Set Menus Idle Logout Time\

The Set Menus Idle Logout Time option can be set between 1 and 60 minutes.

Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout Time

Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout Time

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Password Control \Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout Tim\

The Set TL1 Menus Idle Logout Time option can be set between 1 and 120 minutes.

Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout Time

Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout Time

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Password Control \Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout Time\

The Set TL1 Inband Idle Logout Time option can be set between 1 and 120 minutes.

Restore Default Passwords

Restore Default Passwords

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Password Control \Restore Default Passwords\

The Restore Default Passwords option is used to restore all passwords to the default settings.

CAUTION

When the Restore Default Passwords option is selected, the password controls automatically restore to the default setting without additional prompting.

61179641AL1-5C 5-51

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings Menu

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings

Main Menu \

System Management

\Mode Selection and Current IP Settings\

To remotely manage the Total Access 1248 system, the IP settings must be configured using

the Mode Selection and Current IP Settings menu (see Figure 5-31

).

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings

1. IP Feed RFC1483 Routed

2. Mode Static

3. Configure IP

IP address 192.168.1.1

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 192.168.1.254

TFTP IP address Not Configured

MAC Address 00-a0-c8-12-6d-f9

Rx/Tx Packets 2015/1247

Rx/Tx Cells 5162/6192

Inband PVC Rx OAM Cells 0

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-31. Mode Selection and Current IP Settings Menu

The Mode Selection and Current IP Settings menu items are shown in

Table 5-31 .

5-52 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Table 5-31. Mode Selection and Current IP Settings Menu Items

Option Description

1 IP Feed

2

3

Mode

Configure IP

Function

This option provides 3 choices for the selection of IP

Feed type:

• RFC1483 Routed Encapsulation

• IP over Ethernet

• RFC1483 Bridged Encapsulation

The VPI and VCI of the ATM circuit must be assigned by configuring the IP settings.

This option is used to select either Static or Dynamic.

• In Static Mode, the IP address, Subnet mask, and

Default Gateway are configured manually for inband management of the device.

• In Dynamic Mode, the Total Access 1248 acts as a

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) client and a DHCP server is required upstream from the device to configure the IP settings.

When a DHCP server is properly configured, the

Total Access 1248 system obtains the IP address,

Subnet mask, and Default Gateway from the server and applies these settings to the device.

Depending on the setting of the IP Feed and Mode options, the Configure IP option displays one of the following menus:

“Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu” on page 5-54

“Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu” on page 5-57

“Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu” on page 5-60.

“Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu” on page 5-63.

NOTE

The Media Access Control (MAC) address, which is set at the factory, is required to configure the DHCP server.

61179641AL1-5C 5-53

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu

Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM\

The Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM menu (see Figure 5-32

) is used to manually provision all of the IP settings.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM

1. IP address 192.168.1.1

2. Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

3. VPI/VCI 0/32

4. PCR 3000

5. Default Gateway 192.168.1.254

6. TFTP IP address Not Configured

7. TL1 Port Number(set >1023) 13001

8. TL1 IP Transport type TCP

9. Reset IP Factory Defaults

MAC Address 00-a0-c8-12-6d-f9

Encapsulation is via rfc1483 SNAP

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-32. Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu

The Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM menu options are shown in

Table 5-32 .

Option Description

1 IP address

2

3

4

Table 5-32. Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu Options

Subnet mask

VPI/VCI

PCR

Function

This option is used to configure the IP address in decimal dot format (i.e., ###.###.###.###).

This option is used to configure the subnet mask in decimal dot format.

This option is used to configure the VPI/VCI setting. The

VPI and VCI are used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches.

The VPI/VCI must also be provisioned at the upstream

ATM device.

This option is used to configure the Peak Cell Rate

(PCR). The PCR is the maximum number of cells per second that the ATM can transmit. The PCR default is

3000. Valid values range from 0 to 14488.

5-54 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Table 5-32. Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu Options (Continued)

Option Description

5 Default Gateway

6

7

8

9

TFTP IP address

TL1 Port Number (set >1023)

TL1 IP Transport type

Reset IP Factory Defaults

Function

This option is used to configure the Default Gateway.

The Default Gateway is used to forward traffic to a destination outside of the subnet of the Total Access

1248. The Default Gateway is configured in decimal dot format.

This option is used to configure the TFTP IP address.

The TFTP IP Address must be configured to use TFTP for software upgrade. The TFTP address is configured in decimal dot format.

This field is used to configure the Transaction Language

1 Port Number. The default TL1 Port Number is 13001, however, it can be modified to any number greater than

1023.

This option is used to configure the TL1 IP Transport

Type. Each time the TL1 IP Transport type option is selected, the setting is toggled between User Datagram

Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).

The default is TCP.

This option displays the “Restore IP Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-56.

NOTE

The Media Access Control (MAC) address is set at the factory.

61179641AL1-5C 5-55

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

Restore IP Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \

Static IP Settings - for IP over ATM \Restore IP Factory

Defaults\

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu (see Figure 5-33

) is used to reset all IP settings to the factory defaults.

CAUTION

If Restore IP Factory Defaults is selected remotely, IP connectivity is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore IP Factory Defaults

1. Yes - Service Affecting

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-33. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu option is shown in Table 5-33

.

Table 5-33. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option

Option Definition

1 Yes - Service Affecting

Function

This option restores all options to the IP factory default settings.

5-56 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM\

The Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM menu (see Figure 5-34 ) is used to provision some of

the IP settings. When the Mode option is set to Dynamic, the Total Access 1248 system automatically retrieves the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway from the remote

DHCP server. The remaining menu items can be provisioned manually.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM

IP address 0.0.0.0

Subnet mask 0.0.0.0

3. VPI/VCI 0/32

4. PCR 3000

Default Gateway Not Configured

6. TFTP IP address Not Configured

7. TL1 Port Number(set >1023) 13001

8. TL1 IP Transport type TCP

9. Reset IP Factory Defaults

MAC Address 00-a0-c8-12-6d-f9

Encapsulation is via rfc1483 SNAP

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-34. Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu

The Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM menu items are shown in Table 5-34

.

61179641AL1-5C 5-57

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-34. Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM Menu Items

Option Description

N/A IP address

N/A

3

4

N/A

6

7

8

9

Subnet mask

VPI/VCI

PCR

Default Gateway

TFTP IP address

TL1 Port Number (set >1023)

TL1 IP Transport type

Reset IP Factory Defaults

Function

This option cannot be changed. The IP address is automatically retrieved from the DHCP server.

This option cannot be changed. The Subnet mask is automatically retrieved from the DHCP server.

This option is used to configure the VPI/VCI setting. The

VPI and VCI are used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches.

The VPI/VCI must also be provisioned at the upstream

ATM device.

This option is used to configure the Peak Cell Rate

(PCR). The PCR is the maximum number of cells per second that the ATM can transmit. The PCR default is

3000. Valid values range from 0 to 14488.

This option cannot be changed. The Default Gateway is automatically retrieved from the DHCP server.

This option is used to configure the TFTP IP address.

The TFTP IP Address must be configured to use TFTP for software upgrade. The TFTP address is configured in decimal dot format.

This field is used to configure the Transaction Language

1 Port Number. The default TL1 Port Number is 13001, however, it can be modified to any number greater than

1023.

This option is used to configure the TL1 IP Transport

Type. Each time the TL1 IP Transport type option is selected, the setting is toggled between User Datagram

Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).

The default is TCP.

This option displays the “Restore IP Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-59.

NOTE

The Media Access Control (MAC) address is set at the factory.

5-58 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

Restore IP Factory Defaults

Main Menu

\

System Management \

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over ATM

\Restore IP Factory

Defaults

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu (see Figure 5-35

) is used to reset all of the IP factory defaults.

CAUTION

If Restore IP Factory Defaults is selected remotely, IP connectivity is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore IP Factory Defaults

1. Yes - Service Affecting

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-35. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu option is shown in Table 5-35

.

Table 5-35. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option

Option Definition

1 Yes - Service Affecting

Function

This option restores all options to the IP factory default settings.

61179641AL1-5C 5-59

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu

Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet\

The Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet menu (see Figure 5-36

) is used to manually provision all of the IP settings.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet

1. IP address 192.168.1.1

2. Subnet mask 255.255.255.0

3. Default Gateway 192.168.1.254

4. TFTP IP address Not Configured

5. TL1 Port Number(set >1023) 13001

6. TL1 IP Transport type TCP

7. Reset IP Factory Defaults

MAC Address 00-a0-c8-12-6d-f9

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-36. Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu

The Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet menu options are shown in Table 5-36

.

5-60 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Table 5-36. Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu Options

Option Description

1 IP address

2

3

4

5

6

7

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

TFTP IP address

TL1 Port Number (set >1023)

TL1 IP Transport type

Reset IP Factory Defaults

Function

This option is used to configure the IP address in decimal dot format (i.e., ###.###.###.###).

This option is used to configure the subnet mask in decimal dot format.

This option is used to configure the Default Gateway.

The Default Gateway is used to forward traffic to a destination outside of the subnet of the Total Access

1248. The Default Gateway is configured in decimal dot format.

This option is used to configure the TFTP IP address.

The TFTP IP Address must be configured to use TFTP for software upgrade. The TFTP address is configured in decimal dot format.

This field is used to configure the Transaction Language

1 Port Number. The default TL1 Port Number is 13001, however, it can be modified to any number greater than

1023.

This option is used to configure the TL1 IP Transport

Type. Each time the TL1 IP Transport type option is selected, the setting is toggled between User Datagram

Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).

The default is TCP.

This option displays the “Restore IP Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-62.

NOTE

The Media Access Control (MAC) address is set at the factory.

61179641AL1-5C 5-61

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

Restore IP Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \

Static IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet \Restore IP

Factory Defaults\

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu (see Figure 5-37

) is used to reset all IP settings to the factory defaults.

CAUTION

If Restore IP Factory Defaults is selected remotely, IP connectivity is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore IP Factory Defaults

1. Yes - Service Affecting

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-37. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu option is shown in Table 5-37

.

Table 5-37. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option

Option Definition

1 Yes - Service Affecting

Function

This option restores all options to the IP factory default settings.

5-62 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet\

The Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet menu (see Figure 5-38

) is used to provision some of the IP settings. When the Mode option is set to Dynamic, the Total Access 1248 system automatically retrieves the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway from the remote DHCP server. The remaining menu items can be provisioned manually.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet

IP address 0.0.0.0

Subnet mask 0.0.0.0

Default Gateway Not Configured

4. TFTP IP address Not Configured

5. TL1 Port Number(set >1023) 13001

6. TL1 IP Transport type TCP

7. Reset IP Factory Defaults

MAC Address 00-a0-c8-12-6d-f9

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-38. Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu

The Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet menu items are shown in Table 5-38

.

61179641AL1-5C 5-63

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-38. Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet Menu Items

Option Description

N/A IP address

N/A

N/A

4

5

6

7

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

TFTP IP address

TL1 Port Number (set >1023)

TL1 IP Transport type

Reset IP Factory Defaults

Function

This option cannot be changed. The IP address is automatically retrieved from the DHCP server.

This option cannot be changed. The Subnet mask is automatically retrieved from the DHCP server.

This option cannot be changed. The Default Gateway is automatically retrieved from the DHCP server.

This option is used to configure the TFTP IP address.

The TFTP IP Address must be configured to use TFTP for software upgrade. The TFTP address is configured in decimal dot format.

This field is used to configure the Transaction Language

1 Port Number. The default TL1 Port Number is 13001, however, it can be modified to any number greater than

1023.

This option is used to configure the TL1 IP Transport

Type. Each time the TL1 IP Transport type option is selected, the setting is toggled between User Datagram

Protocol (UDP) and Transmission Control Protocol (TCP).

The default is TCP.

This option displays the “Restore IP Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-65.

NOTE

The Media Access Control (MAC) address is set at the factory.

5-64 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

Restore IP Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Mode Selection and Current IP Settings \

Dynamic IP Settings - for IP over Ethernet \Restore IP

Factory Defaults\

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu (see Figure 5-39

) is used to reset all of the IP factory defaults.

CAUTION

If Restore IP Factory Defaults is selected remotely, IP connectivity is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore IP Factory Defaults

1. Yes - Service Affecting

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-39. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore IP Factory Defaults menu option is shown in Table 5-39

.

Table 5-39. Restore IP Factory Defaults Menu Option

Option Definition

1 Yes - Service Affecting

Function

This option restores all options to the IP factory default settings.

61179641AL1-5C 5-65

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Test IP Address Menu

Test IP Address

Main Menu \

System Management

\Test IP Address\

Ping and Traceroute utilities are included on the Test IP Address menu (see Figure 5-40 ) for

testing the IP configurations.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Test IP Address

1. IP Address Not configured

2. Ping Timeout 1 secs 4. Start Ping

3. Number of Pings 4 pings 5. Start Traceroute

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-40. Test IP Address Menu

The Test IP Address menu options are shown in Table 5-40

.

Option Description

1 IP Address

2

3

4

5

Ping Timeout

Table 5-40. Test IP Address Menu Options

Number of Pings

Start Ping

Start Traceroute

Function

This option is used to set the IP address that is to be tested.

This option is used to set the number of seconds that should pass between pings.

This option is used to set the number of pings that are to be sent during testing of the IP address.

This option is used to initiate the ping test.

This option is used to display the route taken to reach the IP address that is being tested.

5-66 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Time/Date Adjust Menu

Time/Date Adjust

Main Menu \

System Management

\Time/Date Adjust\

The Time/Date Adjust menu (see Figure 5-41 ) is used to set the system time and date. The

time and date appear on most screens and is used for performance monitoring displays.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Time/Date Adjust

1. Adjust Time

2. Adjust Date

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-41. Time/Date Adjust Menu

The Time/Date Adjust menu options are shown in Table 5-41

.

Option Description

1 Adjust Time

2 Adjust Date

Table 5-41. Time/Date Adjust Menu Options

Function

This option is used to set the time in a 24-hour format.

This option is used to set the date in MM/DD/YY format.

61179641AL1-5C 5-67

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Current Baud Rate Menu

Current Baud Rate

Main Menu \

System Management

\Current Baud Rate\

The Current Baud Rate menu (see Figure 5-42

) displays the current baud rate. The default management port baud rate is 9600 bps.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Current Baud Rate: 38400

Baud Rate change is instantaneous, remember to adjust your terminal

1. 9600

2. 19200

3. 38400

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-42. Current Baud Rate Menu

The Current Baud Rate menu options are shown in Table 5-42

.

Option Description

1 9600

2

3

19200

38400

Table 5-42. Current Baud Rate Menu Options

Function

This option configures the baud rate to 9600 bps.

This option configures the baud rate to 19200 bps.

This option configures the baud rate to 38400 bps.

CAUTION

If the baud rate is changed, the rate changes immediately, and the terminal emulation software must be updated to reflect the change.

5-68 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval Screen

TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval

Main Menu \

System Management

\TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval\

The TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval screen (see Figure 5-43

) is used to save provisioning information for the Total Access 1248 system to a remote TFTP server for possible restoration at a later time. In addition to its obvious use for fast recovery of shelf provisioning information, the TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval screen can be used to “clone” baseline system configurations to new installations so that only a few system-specific provisioning options need to be altered.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval

TFTP Server: 100.100.100.100

TFTP Function: Retrieve

TFTP Filename:

Error Status:

Update Progress:

Press Space bar to enter TFTP address

Figure 5-43. TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval Screen

The TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval screen options are shown in Table 5-43 .

61179641AL1-5C 5-69

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-43. TFTP Configuration Storage/Retrieval Screen Fields

Field

TFTP Server

TFTP Function

TFTP Filename

Error Status

Update Progress

Description

Press the spacebar to enter the TFTP address.

This field is used to select the configuration function to perform via TFTP. Options include the following:

• Retrieve - Restores the units provisioning information based on the information contained in the specified TFTP filename on the TFTP server.

• Store - Stores the units provisioning information contained in the specified TFTP filename to a remote TFTP server.

Press the spacebar to select the configuration function to perform.

This field is used to enter the filename to download from/to the server via TFTP. The filename must end with a .cfg extension.

Press the spacebar to enter the filename.

This field displays the status of the TFTP download. The Error

Status messages are as follows:

• File Not Found: This status indicates that the TFTP network server was unable to locate the specified file name or path in the TFTP Server Filename field.

• Access Violation: This status indicates that the TFTP network server denied Total Access 1248 access to the given update filename and path. Please verify appropriate user rights are selected for the specified path.

This field displays the progress of the TFTP download. Progress messages are as follows:

• Contacting Server: This message indicates that an attempt to establish communication with the TFTP network server specified by the server address in the TFTP Server IP

Address field is in progress.

• Beginning TFTP Transfer: This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server has been established and the update file is being transferred between TFTP network server and the Total Access 1248.

• Completed: This message indicates that the Total Access

1248 successfully received the update file.

NOTE

For alternate methods to store or retrieve the Total Access 1248

System Configuration Archive (SCA) file see “SNMP/TFTP and TL1

Configuration Storage and Retrieval” on page 6-2.

5-70 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

SNMP/TL1 Configuration Menu

SNMP/TL1 Configuration

Main Menu \

System Management

\SNMP/TL1 Configuration\

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)/TL1 Configuration menu (see Figure 5-44 )

is used to provision contact information, community names, trap hosts, and the traps enabled option, which provide control to manage SNMP remote access to the system through inband management. The TL1 Target ID (TID) is also set from the SNMP/TL1 Configuration menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

SNMP/TL1 Configuration

1. Contact Information

2. Community Names

3. Trap Hosts

4. Traps Enabled Yes

5. TL1 Target ID TA1248

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-44. SNMP Configuration Menu

The SNMP/TL1 Configuration menu options are shown in Table 5-44

.

Table 5-44. SNMP/TL1 Configuration Menu Options

Option Description

1 Contact Information

2

3

4

5

Community Names

Trap Hosts

Traps Enabled

TL1 Target ID

Function

This option displays the “SNMP Contact Information

Menu” on page 5-72.

This option displays the “SNMP Community Names

Menu” on page 5-73.

This option displays the “SNMP Trap Hosts Menu” on page 5-75.

This option is used to toggle between Yes and No to enable or disable the traps.

This option is used to set the TID. The TID is required to use TL1.

61179641AL1-5C 5-71

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

SNMP Contact Information Menu

SNMP Contact Information

Main Menu \

System Management

\

SNMP/TL1 Configuration

\SNMP Contact Information\

The SNMP Contact Information menu (see

Figure 5-45 ) contains contact information and can

be customized to reflect any contact, name, and location.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

SNMP Contact Information

1. Contact ADTRAN, Inc. (256)963-8000

2. Name TA1248

3. Location

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-45. SNMP Contact Information Menu

The SNMP Contact Information menu options are shown in Table 5-45

.

Option Description

1 Contact

2

3

Name

Table 5-45. SNMP Contact Information Menu Options

Location

Function

This option is used to set the name, phone number, or email address of a person responsible for the SNMP. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

This option is used to set a name for the Total Access

1248. This names is used to distinguish the Total Access

1248 among different installations. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

This option is used to identify the physical location of the unit. Up to 55 alphanumeric characters can be entered in this field, including spaces and special characters (such as an underscore).

5-72 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

SNMP Community Names Menu

SNMP Community Names

Main Menu \

System Management

\

SNMP/TL1 Configuration

\SNMP Community Names\

The SNMP Community Names menu (see

Figure 5-46

) is used to establish up to three named accounts which specify unique IP addresses and privileges for network management. To restrict SNMP remote access to a single IP Address, assign the IP Address to a community. An

IP Address of 0.0.0.0 allows access from all IP Addresses.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

SNMP Community Names

Set Name to 0 to delete Community

1. Name private

2. IP Address 0.0.0.0

3. Privileges Read/Write

4. Name public

5. IP Address 0.0.0.0

6. Privileges Read

7. Name Not Configured

8. IP Address 0.0.0.0

9. Privileges

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-46. SNMP Community Names Menu

The SNMP Community Names menu options are shown in

Table 5-46 .

4 Name

Table 5-46. SNMP Community Names Menu Options

Option Description

1 Name

2

3

IP Address

Privileges

Function

This option is used to configure the first SNMP community. Settings include private and public.

This option is used to configure the first SNMP community IP address in decimal dot format (i.e.,

###.###.###.###).

This option is used to configure the first SNMP community privilege level. Options include Read/Write and Read.

This option is used to configure the second SNMP community. Settings include private and public.

61179641AL1-5C 5-73

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-46. SNMP Community Names Menu Options (Continued)

Option Description

5 IP Address

6

7

8

9

Privileges

Name

IP Address

Privileges

Function

This option is used to configure the second SNMP community IP address in decimal dot format (i.e.,

###.###.###.###).

This option is used to configure the second SNMP community privilege level. Options include Read/Write and Read.

This option is used to configure the third SNMP community. Settings include private and public.

This option is used to configure the third SNMP community IP address in decimal dot format (i.e.,

###.###.###.###).

This option is used to configure the third SNMP community privilege level. Options include Read/Write and Read.

5-74 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

SNMP Trap Hosts Menu

SNMP Trap Hosts

Main Menu \

System Management

\

SNMP/TL1 Configuration

\SNMP Trap Hosts\

The SNMP Trap Hosts Menu (see Figure 5-47

) is used to set multiple IP Addresses (trap destinations) and SNMP versions for notification of a trap. A trap is an automatic alert, or notification, sent to an IP Address. The Total Access 1248 system forwards SNMP traps to all configured hosts as the traps occur.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

SNMP Trap Hosts

Set IP address to enter Trap Host. Set IP address to D to delete Trap Host

1. IP Address 0.0.0.0

2. Version

3. IP Address 0.0.0.0

4. Version

5. IP Address 0.0.0.0

6. Version

7. Trap Port 162

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-47. SNMP Trap Hosts Menu

The SNMP Trap Hosts menu options are shown in

Table 5-47 .

Option Description

1 IP Address

2

3

Version

IP Address

Table 5-47. SNMP Trap Hosts Menu Options

Function

This option is used to configure the first SNMP trap host

IP address in decimal dot format (i.e., ###.###.###.###).

This option is used to configure the SNMP version for the first SNMP trap host. Options include the following:

• SNMPv1

• SNMPv2

This option is used to configure the second SNMP trap host IP address in decimal dot format (i.e.,

###.###.###.###).

61179641AL1-5C 5-75

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Option Description

4 Version

5

6

7

Table 5-47. SNMP Trap Hosts Menu Options (Continued)

IP Address

Version

Trap Port

Function

This option is used to configure the SNMP version for the second SNMP trap host. Options include the following:

• SNMPv1

• SNMPv2

This option is used to configure the third SNMP trap host IP address in decimal dot format (i.e.,

###.###.###.###).

This option is used to configure the SNMP version for the third SNMP trap host. Options include the following:

• SNMPv1

• SNMPv2

This option is used to configure the SNMP trap port. The trap port is defaulted to port 162.

NOTE

The SNMP version should match the agent used for SNMP on the network management side.

5-76 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Code Download Method Menu

Code Download Method

Main Menu \

System Management

\Code Download Method\

The Code Download Method menu displays two methods to download code (see Figure 5-48

).

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Code Download Method

1. Y-Modem (Craft Port)

2. TFTP

3. Auto Firmware Upgrade Provisioning

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-48. Code Download Method Menu

The Code Download Method menu options are shown in

Table 5-48 .

Option Description

1 Y-Modem

2 TFTP

3

Table 5-48. Code Download Method Menu Options

Auto Firmware Upgrade

Provisioning

Function

This option displays the “Y-Modem Menu” on page 5-78.

This option displays the “TFTP Download Screen” on page 5-79.

This option displays the “Auto Upgrade Configuration

(AUC) Status Menu” on page 5-81.

CAUTION

Downloading new code is service affecting.

61179641AL1-5C 5-77

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

NOTE

The System Management menu TFTP IP address option must be configured to use TFTP.

Y-Modem Menu

Y-Modem

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Code Download Method \Y-Modem\

The Y-Modem menu (see Figure 5-49 ) is used to download code stored from a computer to the

Total Access 1248 through the craft port.

NOTE

To expedite the download time, change the baud rate to 38400 bps prior to downloading code. For more information, refer to

“Current

Baud Rate Menu” on page 5-68.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

WARNING! THIS IS SERVICE AFFECTING!

Y-Modem is the file transfer protocol.

This function cannot be initiated via a telnet

connection (use TFTP instead).

1. Download Network Module Code

2. Exit

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-49. Y-Modem Menu

To download code via the Y-Modem menu, perform the following steps:

1. Access the system with System Administrator privileges using a terminal application that allows file transfers, such as HyperTerminal.

2. From the Y-Modem menu, select Download Network Module Code , and press E NTER

.

The Y-Modem receive utility begins.

3. If using HyperTerminal, select Transfer from the menu, and select Send File .

5-78 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

4. Browse to the file containing the code, select Ymodem for the drop-down menu, and select

S END

.

NOTE

The code begins transmitting from the terminal emulation package.

When the download is complete, the unit restarts automatically.

NOTE

If the download is cancelled due to inactivity, press E SC

to return to the Code Download Method menu and restart the procedure.

TFTP Download Screen

TFTP Download

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Code Download Method \TFTP Download\

The TFTP Download screen (see

Figure 5-50

) is used to download code stored from a computer to the Total Access 1248 through a TFTP server.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

TFTP Download

TFTP Server: 10.13.254.20

Get Code For: Host

TFTP Filename:

Error Status:

Update progress:

Press Space bar to enter TFTP address

Figure 5-50. TFTP Download Screen

The TFTP Download screen fields are shown in

Table 5-49 .

61179641AL1-5C 5-79

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Field

TFTP Server

Get Code For

TFTP Filename

Error Status

Update Progress

Table 5-49. TFTP Download Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the IP address of the TFTP server. The TFTP

IP address must be configured prior to attempting a TFTP download.

This field displays the module that will be upgraded.

This field displays the TFTP filename that will be used to upgrade the module shown in the Get Code For field. The TFTP filename must be known and must match the part number.

This field displays the status of the TFTP download. The Error

Status messages are as follows:

• File Not Found: This status indicates that the TFTP network server was unable to locate the specified file name or path in the TFTP Server Filename field.

• Access Violation: This status indicates that the TFTP network server denied Total Access 1248 access to the given update filename and path. Please verify appropriate user rights are selected for the specified path.

This field displays the progress of the TFTP download. Progress messages are as follows:

• Contacting Server: This message indicates that an attempt to establish communication with the TFTP network server specified by the server address in the TFTP Server IP

Address field is in progress.

• Beginning TFTP Transfer: This message indicates that communication with the TFTP network server has been established and the update file is being transferred between

TFTP network server and the Total Access 1248.

• Completed: This message indicates that the Total Access

1248 successfully received the update file.

5-80 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Code Download Method \Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status\

The Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status menu (see

Figure 5-51 ) provides methods to

manually or automatically upgrade the Total Access 1248 firmware. When enabled, the Auto

Upgrade operation performs the following tasks:

• reads the AUC Configuration file from the designated AUC TFTP server

• validates the file

• upgrades the parameters that need to be updated

• updates the unit with new firmware as required

• reboots the unit if new firmware has been downloaded

All required parameter changes will occur first, followed by the checking of each unit for a required upgrade.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status

1. AUC Config File 1248.auc

2. AUC Mode Manual

3. AUC Refresh Interval 5 hour(s)

4. AUC Upgrade Retries 3

5. AUC TFTP Server 192.168.1.105

6. AUC Base Path

Selection :

Comp/Errs/Pend Last Action / Status (Current or Last)

AUC File 2/ 1 MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS/AUC parsing complete

Host 2/ 0/No MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS/Update Complete on Host

C - Clear AUC Status R - Read AUC File S - Start Upgrade Process

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-51. Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu

The Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status menu options are shown in

Table 5-50 .

61179641AL1-5C 5-81

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Option Description

1 AUC Config File

2

3

4

5

6

Table 5-50. Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu Options

AUC Mode

AUC Refresh Interval

AUC Upgrade Retries

AUC TFTP Server

AUC Base Path

Function

This option is used to enter the AUC Config File name.

The text entry field is limited to 40 characters and must end with the *.auc file extension.

This option is used to specify the auto upgrade mode.

Options include the following:

• Auto - indicates that unit should be automatically checked and upgraded.

• Manual - indicates that unit should be checked at the AUC Refresh Interval rate and upgraded only when instructed via SNMP or the menus.

• Disable - all automatic upgrade operations are disabled.

This option specifies how often (in hours) the unit should check the AUC TFTP Server for changes to the

AUC Config File. Valid entries are 0 - 744. A value of zero

(0) indicates the server should not be checked and disables any further Auto Upgrade operations.

This option specifies the number of software upgrade attempts that are to be made as a result of a failure.

Valid entries are 0 - 10.

This option specifies the IP address of the AUC TFTP

Server.

This option specifies a directory prefix where the Auto

Upgrade configuration and flash firmware files will be located on the customer file server.

NOTE

Auto Upgrade operations will not be initiated if the AUC Refresh

Interval option is set to zero, the AUC Config File option is empty, the configuration file cannot be retrieved from the AUC TFTP

Server, or the configuration file contains errors.

5-82 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Separate status information is provided for the file retrieval operation and the actual upgrade operation. The Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status menu status fields are defined in

Table 5-51

.

Table 5-51. Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu Status Fields

Field

Comp/Errs/Pend

Last Action

Status (Current or Last)

Description

This field displays the number of operations completed (Comp), the number of errors (Errs), and pending (Pend) operations.

This field displays a Date/Time stamp for when the last action completed.

This field displays a brief comment describing the current state of the Auto Upgrade system or the progress of an active operation.

The three hot keys associated with the Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status menu are defined in

Table 5-52

.

Table 5-52. Auto Upgrade Configuration (AUC) Status Menu Hot Keys

Hot Key Function

C Clear AUC Status

R

S

Read AUC File

Start Upgrade Process

Description

This hot key clears all the status information from the menu and updates the Status Information Cleared: field with the date and time that the action occurred. This hot key is available in all AUC modes.

This hot key initiates a retrieve of the configuration file from the file server. This hot key is available in the Auto and Manual AUC modes.

This hot key starts the upgrade process. This hot key is available in the Manual AUC mode.

61179641AL1-5C 5-83

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Restore Factory Defaults Menu

Restore Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

System Management

\Restore Factory Defaults\

The Restore Factory Defaults menu (see

Figure 5-52

) is used to remotely restore the system to factory defaults.

CAUTION

This action is service affecting. If the system is accessed remotely through a static IP address, the system resets and access is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore Factory Defaults

WARNING! THIS IS SERVICE AFFECTING!

All parameters will be returned to their factory defaults

and the card will be restarted.

1. Restore

2. Exit

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-52. Restore Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore Factory Defaults menu options are shown in Table 5-53

.

2 Exit

Table 5-53. Restore Factory Defaults Menu Options

Option Description

1 Restore

Function

This option restores all options to the factory default settings.

This option returns the display to the “System

Management Menu” on page 5-47. The factory defaults

are not restored.

5-84 61179641AL1-5C

Reset System Menu

Reset System

Main Menu \

System Management

\Reset System\

The Reset System menu (see Figure 5-53

) is used to reboot the entire system.

CAUTION

This action is service affecting. If the system is accessed remotely through a static IP address, the system resets and access is lost until the system reboot is completed.

When the Reset System option is selected, the system resets the host unit and all client units without additional prompting.

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Reset System

WARNING! THIS IS SERVICE AFFECTING!

This option resets the entire system.

All system parameters will be retained.

Reset occurs immediately.

1. Reset

2. Exit

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-53. Reset System Menu

The Reset System menu options are shown in Table 5-54

.

Option Description

1 Reset

2 Exit

Table 5-54. Reset System Menu Options

Function

This option reboots the Total Access 1248. All system options are retained.

This option returns the display to the “System

Management Menu” on page 5-47. The system does not

reboot.

61179641AL1-5C 5-85

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Self Test Menu

Self Test

Main Menu \

System Management

\Self Test\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-54

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the Self Test menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (configured)

3. Client 2 (configured)

4. Client 3 (configured)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-54. Select Shelf Menu

The Self Test menu (see

Figure 5-55

) displays ROM, RAM, and EEPROM test results after a reboot of the Total Access 1248 system. If any tests result in a failed status, the word “ Failed ” displays next to that test and the PWR LED turns red. An option is provided to test the Total

Access 1248 fans.

5-86 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Shelf = Host

Self Test

1. Run Fan Self Test

Selection :

Fan #1 Test Ready to Test

Fan #2 Test Ready to Test

Fan #3 Test Ready to Test

Fan #4 Test Ready to Test

ROM Test PASSED

RAM Test PASSED

EEPROM Test PASSED

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-55. Self Test Menu

The Self Test menu option is shown in

Table 5-55 .

Option Description

1 Run Fan Self Test

Table 5-55. Self Test Menu Option

Function

This option initiates the Total Access 1248 fan self test.

61179641AL1-5C 5-87

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

External Alarms Menu

External Alarms

Main Menu \

System Management

\External Alarms\

The External Alarms menu (see Figure 5-56

) is used to customize the profiles for up to three external alarms. The alarms can be assigned unique names and an associated severity level

(refer to

“External Alarm Severity Menu” on page 5-89).

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

External Alarms

1. Alarm #1 Text - External Alarm Input #1 4. Severity - Minor

2. Alarm #2 Text - External Alarm Input #2 5. Severity - Minor

3. Alarm #3 Text - External Alarm Input #3 6. Severity - Minor

7. Fan Alarm Delay 10 Min

8. Restore External Alarm Defaults

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-56. External Alarms Menu

The External Alarms menu options are shown in

Table 5-56

.

Table 5-56. External Alarms Menu Options

Option Description

1-3 Alarm #n Text

4-6

7

8

Severity

Fan Alarm Delay

Restore External Alarm

Defaults

Function

Options 1 to 3 are used to enter a 25-character text string used to identify each of the three external alarms.

Options 4 to 6 are used to assign severity levels to each of the three external alarms. For more information, refer

to “External Alarm Severity Menu” on page 5-89.

This option is used to set the fan alarm activation delay.

Valid values range from 0 to 15 minutes.

This option is used to restore all of the External Alarms to factory default values.

5-88 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

External Alarm Severity Menu

External Alarm Severity

Main Menu \

System Management

\

External Alarms

\External Alarm Severity\

The External Alarm Severity menu (see

Figure 5-57

) is used to set customized alarm profiles for each of the three external alarms.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

External Alarm Severity

1. Critical

2. Major

3. Minor

4. Load Shedding

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-57. External Alarm Severity Menu

The External Alarm Severity menu options are shown in

Table 5-57

.

Table 5-57. External Alarm Severity Menu Options

Option Description

1 Critical

2

3

4

Major

Minor

Load Shedding

Function

This option is used to designate a critical alarm.

This option is used to designate a major alarm.

This option is used to designate a minor alarm.

This option is used to designate a critical alarm to shutdown ADSL services. When Load shedding is engaged, power usage in the Total Access 1248 is reduced.

NOTE

The alarm severity levels are user-defined based on the impact to customer service.

61179641AL1-5C 5-89

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Expansion Menu

Expansion

Main Menu \

System Management

\Expansion\

The Expansion Menu (see

Figure 5-58 ) is used to enable or disable expansion capabilities for

up to four Total Access 1248 units (one host and three clients). The expansion mode can only be enabled on the host units.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Expansion Menu

1. Mode Enabled (Host)

2. Clear Packet Counts

Selection :

Maintenance Packets:(TX/RX) 0/0

Expansion Out Link: DOWN

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-58. Expansion Menu

The Expansion Menu options are shown in

Table 5-58 . The Expansion Menu fields are shown in Table 5-59

.

Option Description

1 Mode

2

Table 5-58. Expansion Menu Options

Clear Packet Counts

Function

This option is used to designate Enabled (Host) or

Disabled.

This option is used to clear all packet counts.

Field

Maintenance Packets

Expansion Out Link

Table 5-59. Expansion Menu Fields

Description

This field displays the number of packets that have been transmitted and received.

This displays the status of the expansion link.

5-90 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Modem Configuration Menu

Modem Configuration

Main Menu \

System Management

\Modem Configuration\

The Modem Configuration menu (see Figure 5-59

) is used to provision the modem options.

The V.90 modem is used for remote operation.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Modem Configuration

1. Prompt User on call received Yes

2. Number of Rings 2 (when logged off)

3. Caller ID Features

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-59. Modem Configuration Menu

The Modem Configuration menu options are shown in Table 5-60

.

Option Description

1 Prompt User on call received

2 Number of Rings

3

Table 5-60. Modem Configuration Menu Options

Caller ID Features

Function

This option is used to enable or disable call notification.

This option is used to set the number of rings that are received before the system establishes a connection.

This option displays the “Caller ID Features Menu” on page 5-92.

61179641AL1-5C 5-91

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Caller ID Features Menu

Caller ID Features

Main Menu \

System Management

\

Modem Configuration \Caller ID Features\

The Caller ID Features menu (see

Figure 5-60 ) is used to provision the caller ID options.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Caller ID Features

1. Caller ID Disabled

2. Reject Calls with no Caller ID No

3. Only Allow Specified Phone Numbers No

4. Phone Numbers

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-60. Caller ID Features Menu

The Caller ID Features menu options are shown in

Table 5-61 .

Option Description

1 Caller ID

2

3

4

Table 5-61. Caller ID Features Menu Options

Reject Calls with no Caller ID

Only Allow Specified Phone

Numbers

Phone Numbers

Function

This option is used to enable or disable the Caller ID option.

This option is used to reject call that do not contain a

Caller ID. The Caller ID option above must be enabled for this option to be enabled.

This option is used to specify if the system accepts a call from any phone number or only specified numbers.

This option is used to enter one or two phone numbers that the system validates before establishing a connection.

5-92 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Network Port Menu

Network Port

Main Menu \Network Port\

The Network Port menu (see Figure 5-61

) is used to view T1 or E1 circuits, configure the IMA

Group, and access the T1 or E1 interfaces.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Network Port

1. T1

2. IMA

3. Select T1/E1 Mode

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-61. Network Port Menu

NOTE

The proper mode should be selected prior to configuring a T1 or E1 circuit.

The Network Port menu options are shown in Table 5-62

.

Option Description

1 T1/E1

2

3

IMA

Table 5-62. Network Port Menu Options

Select T1/E1 Mode

Function

This option displays the “T1 Main Menu”

on page

5-94.

or

This option displays the “E1 Main Menu” on page

5-105.

This option displays the “IMA Main Menu” on page 5-

113.

This option displays the “T1/E1 Menu” on page 5-137.

61179641AL1-5C 5-93

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

T1 Main Menu

T1 Main Menu

Main Menu \

Network Port

\T1 Main Menu\

From the T1 Main Menu (see Figure 5-62

), all T1 provisioning, status reporting and performance monitoring can be viewed.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1 Main Menu

1. T1 Provisioning

2. T1 Status

3. T1 Performance

4. Test

5. Restore T1 Factory Defaults

6. SNMP/Menu Loopback Detection: Enabled

7. Inband Loopback Detection: Enabled

8. FDL Loopback Detection: Enabled

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-62. T1 Main Menu

The T1 Main Menu options are shown in

Table 5-63 .

5-94 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Option Description

1 T1 Provisioning

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

T1 Status

T1 Performance

Test

Table 5-63. T1 Main Menu Options

Restore T1 Factory Defaults

SNMP/Menu Loopback

Detection

Inband Loopback Detection

FDL Loopback Detection

Function

This option displays the “T1 Provisioning Menu” on page

5-96.

This option displays the

“T1 Status Menu” on page 5-98.

This option displays the “T1 PM Main Menu” on page 5-

100.

This option displays the “T1 Test Menu” on page

5-103.

This option displays the “Restore T1 Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-104.

This option enables or disables SNMP/Menu Loopback

Detection. Option selection toggles between states.

This option enables or disables Inband Loopback

Detection. Option selection toggles between states.

This option enables or disables FDL Loopback Detection.

Option selection toggles between states.

61179641AL1-5C 5-95

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

T1 Provisioning Menu

T1 Provisioning

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

T1 Main Menu

\T1 Provisioning\

The T1 Provisioning screen (see

Figure 5-63 ) displays the current T1 settings.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1 Provisioning for # 1

1. Type DSX

2. Framing ESF

3. Line Code B8ZS

4. Line Build Out 0 - 133 ft

'N' - Next T1 Port 'P' - Previous T1 Port

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-63. T1 Provisioning Menu

The T1 Provisioning menu options are shown in

Table 5-64 .

5-96 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Option Description

1 Type

2 Framing

3

4

Line Code

Table 5-64. T1 Provisioning Menu Options

Line Build Out

T1 Function

This field displays the T1 circuit type.

This field displays the framing setting for the T1 circuit.

Settings include the following:

• SF

• ESF

This field displays the line code setting for the T1 circuit.

Settings include the following:

• B8ZS

• AMI

This field displays the line build out settings based upon the Type setting. Settings include the following:

Type = DSX

• 0-133 feet

• 133-266 feet

• 266-399 feet

• 399-533 feet

• 533-655 feet

Type = T1

• 0 dB

• –7.5 dB

• –15 dB

• –22.5 dB

61179641AL1-5C 5-97

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

T1 Status Menu

T1 Status

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

T1 Main Menu

\T1 Status\

The T1 Status menu (see Figure 5-64 ) displays the status of the T1 network circuits and a

summary of the associated alarm counts.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1 Status

1 2 3 4

Type DSX DSX DSX DSX

Framing ESF ESF ESF ESF

Line Code B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS B8ZS

Line Build Out 0-133 0-133 0-133 0-133

T1 Alarm RED RED RED RED

Total Alarms

Red 2 2 2 2

Yellow 0 0 0 0

Blue 0 0 0 0

10. Reset Alarm Counts Cleared:

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-64. T1 Status Menu

The T1 Status menu fields are shown in Table 5-65

.

5-98 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Option Field

N/A Type

N/A Framing

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

10

Line Code

Line Build Out

T1 Alarm

Total Alarms Red

Table 5-65. T1 Status Menu Options

Total Alarms Yellow

Total Alarms Blue

Reset Alarm Counts

Function

This field displays the T1 circuit type.

This field displays the framing setting for the T1 circuit.

For more information, see

Table 5-64 on page 5-97.

This field displays the line code setting for the T1 circuit.

For more information, see

Table 5-64 on page 5-97.

This field displays the line build out setting. For more information, see

Table 5-64 on page 5-97.

This field indicates if there are any T1 alarms.

This field indicates the number of Loss of Signal (Red) alarms.

This field indicates the number of Receive Remote Alarm

Indication (Yellow) alarms.

This field indicates the number of Receive Alarm

Indication Signal (Blue) alarms.

This option is used to clear all the T1 Status alarm fields.

61179641AL1-5C 5-99

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

T1 PM Main Menu

T1 PM

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

T1 Main Menu

\T1 PM\

The T1 PM Main Menu (see Figure 5-65

) is used to access the T1 performance monitoring displays in 24-hour and 15-minute increments for the current port selected and to clear all T1 performance monitoring data.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1 PM Main Menu

1. T1 PM

2. Clear All T1 PM

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-65. T1 PM Main Menu

The T1 PM Main Menu options are shown in Table 5-66

.

Option Definition

1 T1 PM

2 Clear All T1 PM

Table 5-66. T1 PM Main Menu Options

Function

This option displays the

“T1 Performance Monitoring

Status Screen” on page 5-101.

This option clears T1 performance monitoring data for all ports.

5-100 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen

T1 Performance Monitoring Status

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

T1 Main Menu

\

T1 PM \T1 Performance Monitoring Status\

The T1 Performance Monitoring Status screen (see Figure 5-66

) displays performance monitoring in 24-hour and 15-minute increments for the current port selected.

NOTE

To display the Abbreviations screen, press “ ?

”.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1 Performance Monitoring Status - T1 Port:1

UAS-P ES-P SES-P CV-P CV-L ES-L

24 Hr - Current 24845 0 0 0 0 0

--/-- - - - - - -

15 Min - Current 784 0 0 0 0 0

08:30 900 0 0 0 0 0

08:15 900 0 0 0 0 0

08:00 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:45 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:30 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:15 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:00 900 0 0 0 0 0

06:45 900 0 0 0 0 0

B - Backward(2hrs/15min PM) F - Forward(2hrs/15min PM)

S - Select Port P - Previous Port N - Next Port C - Clear PM Stats

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-66. T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen

The T1 Performance Monitoring Status screen codes are shown in Table 5-67

.

Code

UAS-P

ES-P

SES-P

Table 5-67. T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Codes

Definition

Unavailable Seconds

Errored Seconds

Severely Errored Seconds

Description

This code indicates seconds with a loss of signal or synchronization on the path.

This code indicates seconds with either a bipolar violation or a CRC-6 error on the path.

This code indicates seconds with 1544 bipolar violations or 320 CRC-6 errors on the path.

61179641AL1-5C 5-101

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Code

CV-P

CV-L

ES-L

Table 5-67. T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Codes (Continued)

Definition

Code Violations

Code Violations

Errored Seconds

Description

This code indicates an occurrence of either a CRC-6 error or frame bit error on the path.

This code indicates an occurrence of either a CRC-6 error or frame bit error on the line.

This code indicates seconds with either a bipolar violation or a CRC-6 error on the line.

The T1 Performance Monitoring Status screen hot keys are defined in Table 5-68

.

C

F

N

P

S

Table 5-68. T1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

B Backward(2hrs/15min PM)

Clear PM Stats

Forward(2hrs/15min PM)

Next Port

Previous Port

Select Port

Function

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

5-102 61179641AL1-5C

T1 Test Menu

T1 Test

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

T1 Main Menu

\T1 Test\

Figure 5-67 shows the T1 Test Menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Menu Descriptions

T1 Test Menu for Port # 1 - No Loopback

1. Payload Loopback

2. Line Loopback

3. Local Loopback

4. No Loopback

5. Clear T1 Loopbacks On All Ports

'N' - Next T1 Port 'P' - Previous T1 Port

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-67. T1 Test Menu

The T1 Test Menu options are shown in

Table 5-69 .

Option Definition

1 Payload Loopback

2

3

4

Line Loopback

Local Loopback

No Loopback

5

Table 5-69. T1 Test Menu Options

Clear T1 Loopbacks On All

Ports

Function

This option is used to select a payload loopback test.

This option is used to select a line loopback test.

This option is used to select a local loopback test.

This option is used to deselect a loopback test or to indicate no loopback is specified.

This option clears all T1 loopbacks on all ports without further prompting.

61179641AL1-5C 5-103

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Restore T1 Factory Defaults Menu

Restore T1 Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

T1 Main Menu

\Restore T1 Factory Defaults\

The Restore T1 Factory Defaults menu (see

Figure 5-68

) provides the option to restore the line settings for all T1 ports.

CAUTION

This action is service affecting. If the system is accessed remotely through a static IP address, the system resets and access is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore T1 Factory Defaults

1. Yes - Service Affecting

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-68. Restore T1 Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore T1 Factory Defaults menu option is shown in

Table 5-70 .

Table 5-70. Restore T1 Factory Defaults Menu Option

Option Definition

1 Yes - Service Affecting

Function

This option restores all options to the T1 factory default settings.

5-104 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

E1 Main Menu

E1 Main Menu

Main Menu \

Network Port

\E1 Main Menu\

From the E1 Main Menu (see Figure 5-69 ), all E1 provisioning, status reporting and perfor-

mance monitoring can be viewed.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

E1 Main Menu

1. E1 Provisioning

2. E1 Status

3. E1 Performance

4. Test

5. Restore E1 Factory Defaults

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-69. E1 Main Menu

The E1 Main Menu options are shown in Table 5-71

.

Option Description

1 E1 Provisioning

2

3

4

5

E1 Status

E1 Performance

Test

Table 5-71. E1 Main Menu Options

Restore E1 Factory Defaults

Function

This option displays the

“E1 Provisioning Menu”

on page

5-106.

This option displays the “E1 Status Menu” on page 5-

107.

This option displays the “E1 PM Main Menu” on page 5-

108.

This option displays the “E1 Test Menu”

on page

5-111.

This option displays the “Restore E1 Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-112.

61179641AL1-5C 5-105

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

E1 Provisioning Menu

E1 Provisioning

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

E1 Main Menu \E1 Provisioning\

The E1 Provisioning screen (see

Figure 5-70 ) displays the current E1 settings.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

E1 Provisioning for # 1

1. Framing FAS+CRC

2. Line Code HDB3

'N' - Next E1 Port 'P' - Previous E1 Port

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-70. E1 Provisioning Menu

The E1 Provisioning menu fields are shown in

Table 5-72 .

Option Description

1 Framing

2 Line Code

Table 5-72. E1 Provisioning Menu Options

Function

This field displays the framing setting for the E1 circuit.

Settings include the following:

• FAS+CRC

• FAS

This field displays the line code setting for the E1 circuit.

Settings include the following:

• HDB3

• AMI

5-106 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

E1 Status Menu

E1 Status

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

E1 Main Menu \E1 Status\

The E1 Status Menu (see Figure 5-71

) displays the status of the E1 network circuits and a summary of the associated alarm counts.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

E1 Status

1 2 3 4

Framing FAS+CRC FAS+CRC FAS+CRC FAS+CRC

Line Code HDB3 HDB3 HDB3 HDB3

E1 Alarm RED RED RED RED

Total Alarms

Red 2 2 2 2

Yellow 0 0 0 0

Blue 0 0 0 0

8. Reset Alarm Counts Cleared:

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-71. E1 Status Menu

The E1 Status menu options are shown in

Table 5-73 .

Option Field

N/A Framing

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

8

Line Code

E1 Alarm

Total Alarms Red

Table 5-73. E1 Status Menu Options

Total Alarms Yellow

Total Alarms Blue

Reset Alarm Counts

Function

This field displays the framing setting for the E1 circuit.

For more information, see

Table 5-72 on page 5-106.

This field displays the line code setting for the E1 circuit. For more information, see

Table 5-72 on page 5-

106.

This field indicates if there are any E1 alarms.

This field indicates the number of Loss of Signal (Red) alarms.

This field indicates the number of Receive Remote Alarm

Indication (Yellow) alarms.

This field indicates the number of Receive Alarm

Indication Signal (Blue) alarms.

This option is used to clear all the E1 status alarm fields.

61179641AL1-5C 5-107

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

E1 PM Main Menu

E1 PM Main Menu

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

E1 Main Menu \E1 PM Main Menu\

The E1 PM Main Menu (see

Figure 5-72 ) is used to access the E1 performance monitoring

displays in 24-hour and 15-minute increments for the current port selected and to clear all E1 performance monitoring data.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

E1 PM Main Menu

1. E1 PM

2. Clear All E1 PM

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-72. E1 PM Main Menu

The E1 PM Main Menu options are shown in

Table 5-74 .

Option Definition

1 E1 PM

2 Clear All E1 PM

Table 5-74. E1 PM Main Menu Options

Function

This option displays the

“E1 Performance Monitoring

Status Screen” on page 5-109.

This option clears E1 performance monitoring data for all ports.

5-108 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen

E1 Performance Monitoring Status

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

E1 Main Menu \

E1 PM Main Menu

\E1 Performance Monitoring Status\

The E1 Performance Monitoring Status screen (see Figure 5-73 ) displays performance

monitoring in 24-hour and 15-minute increments for the current port selected.

NOTE

To display the Abbreviations screen, press “ ?

”.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

E1 Performance Monitoring Status - E1 Port:1

UAS-P ES-P SES-P CV-P CV-L ES-L

24 Hr - Current 25279 0 0 0 0 0

--/-- - - - - - -

15 Min - Current 312 0 0 0 0 0

08:45 900 0 0 0 0 0

08:30 900 0 0 0 0 0

08:15 900 0 0 0 0 0

08:00 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:45 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:30 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:15 900 0 0 0 0 0

07:00 900 0 0 0 0 0

B - Backward(2hrs/15min PM) F - Forward(2hrs/15min PM)

S - Select Port P - Previous Port N - Next Port C - Clear PM Stats

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-73. E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen

The E1 Performance Monitoring Status screen codes are shown in

Table 5-75 .

Code

UAS-P

ES-P

SES-P

Table 5-75. E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Codes

Definition

Unavailable Seconds

Errored Seconds

Severely Errored Seconds

Description

This code indicates seconds with a loss of signal or synchronization on the path.

This code indicates seconds with either a bipolar violation or a CRC-6 error on the path.

This code indicates seconds with 1544 bipolar violations or 320 CRC-6 errors on the path.

61179641AL1-5C 5-109

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Code

CV-P

CV-L

ES-L

Table 5-75. E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Codes (Continued)

Definition

Code Violations

Code Violations

Errored Seconds

Description

This code indicates an occurrence of either a CRC-6 error or frame bit error on the path.

This code indicates an occurrence of either a CRC-6 error or frame bit error on the line.

This code indicates seconds with either a bipolar violation or a CRC-6 error on the line.

The E1 Performance Monitoring Status screen hot keys are defined in

Table 5-76 .

C

F

N

P

S

Table 5-76. E1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

B Backward(2hrs/15min PM)

Clear PM Stats

Forward(2hrs/15min PM)

Next Port

Previous Port

Select Port

Function

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

5-110 61179641AL1-5C

E1 Test Menu

E1 Test

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

E1 Main Menu \E1 Test\

Figure 5-74 shows the E1 Test Menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Menu Descriptions

E1 Test Menu for Port # 1 - No Loopback

1. Payload Loopback

2. Line Loopback

3. Local Loopback

4. No Loopback

5. Clear E1 Loopbacks On All Ports

'N' - Next E1 Port 'P' - Previous E1 Port

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-74. E1 Test Menu

The E1 Test Menu options are shown in Table 5-77

.

Option Definition

1 Payload Loopback

2

3

4

Line Loopback

Local Loopback

No Loopback

5

Table 5-77. E1 Test Menu Options

Clear E1 Loopbacks On All

Ports

Function

This option is used to select a payload loopback test.

This option is used to select a line loopback test.

This option is used to select a local loopback test.

This option is used to deselect a loopback test or to indicate no loopback is specified.

This option clears all loopbacks without further prompting.

61179641AL1-5C 5-111

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Restore E1 Factory Defaults Menu

Restore E1 Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

E1 Main Menu \Restore E1 Factory Defaults\

The Restore E1 Factory Defaults menu (see

Figure 5-75

) provides the option to restore the line settings for all E1 ports.

CAUTION

This action is service affecting. If the system is accessed remotely through a static IP address, the system resets and access is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore E1 Factory Defaults

1. Yes - Service Affecting

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-75. Restore E1 Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore E1 Factory Defaults menu option is shown in Table 5-78

.

Table 5-78. Restore E1 Factory Defaults Menu Option

Option Definition

1 Yes - Service Affecting

Function

This option restores all options to the E1 factory default settings.

5-112 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Main Menu

IMA Main Menu

Main Menu \

Network Port

\IMA Main Menu\

The Total Access 1248 system is fed by virtual circuits using IMA. The IMA Main menu (see

Figure 5-76 ) is the central point for managing and provisioning the Total Access 1248 IMA

related options.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Main Menu

1. IMA Configuration

2. Provisioning

3. Status / Failure Monitoring

4. Test

5. Performance Monitoring Data

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-76. IMA Main Menu

The IMA Main Menu options are shown in Table 5-79

.

Table 5-79. IMA Main Menu Options

Option Description

1 IMA Configuration

2

3

4

5

Provisioning

Status/Failure Monitoring

Test

Performance Monitoring Data

Function

This option displays the “IMA Configuration Screen” on page 5-114.

This option displays the “IMA Provisioning Menu” on page 5-115.

This option displays the “Status/Failure Monitoring

Menu” on page 5-124.

This option displays the “IMA Loopback Menu” on page 5-131.

This option displays the “IMA Performance Monitoring

Menu” on page 5-132.

61179641AL1-5C 5-113

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

IMA Configuration Screen

IMA Configuration Screen

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\IMA Configuration Screen\

The IMA Configuration screen (see

Figure 5-77 ) displays the IMA Firmware Revision and IMA

Link type. This screen is informational only.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Configuration

IMA Firmware Revision 77

IMA Link Type DS1 / T1 (1.544 Mbps)

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-77. IMA Configuration Screen

5-114 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Provisioning Menu

IMA Provisioning

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\IMA Provisioning\

The IMA Provisioning menu (see

Figure 5-78 ) is used to provision and maintain IMA functions.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Provisioning

1. IMA Facility

2. IMA Group

3. Shortcut Setup

4. Scrambler

5. Restore IMA Factory Defaults

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-78. IMA Provisioning Menu

The IMA Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 5-80

.

Option Description

1 IMA Facility

2

3

4

5

IMA Group

Shortcut Setup

Scrambler

Table 5-80. IMA Provisioning Menu Options

Restore IMA Factory Defaults

Function

This option displays the “IMA Facility Provisioning

Menu” on page 5-116.

This option displays the

“IMA Group Provisioning Menu” on page 5-119.

This option displays the “IMA Shortcut Setup Menu” on page 5-121.

This option displays the “IMA Scrambler Menu” on page 5-122.

This option displays the “Restore IMA Factory Defaults

Menu” on page 5-123.

61179641AL1-5C 5-115

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

IMA Facility Provisioning Menu

IMA Facility Provisioning

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Provisioning

\IMA Facility Provisioning\

The IMA Facility Provisioning menu (see Figure 5-79

) provides provisioning of the IMA links on a per facility basis.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Facility Provisioning for # 1

1. All Facilities Summary

2. Facility Operation Mode IMA_Group

Receive Group 1

Receive Link ID 0

Receive ATM Address N/A

Transmit Group 1

Transmit Link ID 0

Transmit ATM Address N/A

'N' - Next IMA Facility 'P' - Previous IMA Facility

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-79. IMA Facility Provisioning Menu

The IMA Facility Provisioning menu options are shown in Table 5-81

.

Option Description

1 All Facilities Summary

2

Table 5-81. IMA Facility Provisioning Menu Options

Facility Operation Mode

Function

This option displays the “IMA All Facilities Provisioning

Screen” on page 5-117.

This option displays the “Operation Mode for Facility

Menu” on page 5-118.

For information on the IMA Facility Provisioning fields, refer to

Table 5-82 on page 5-117.

5-116 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA All Facilities Provisioning Screen

IMA All Facilities Provisioning

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Provisioning

\

IMA Facility Provisioning \IMA All Facilities Provisioning\

The IMA All Facilities Provisioning screen (see

Figure 5-80

) provides a summary of all the IMA facilities.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA All Facilities Provisioning

Fac1 Fac2 Fac3 Fac4

Operation Mode IMA Grp IMA Grp IMA Grp IMA Grp

RX Group 1 1 1 1

RX Link ID 0 1 2 3

RX ATM Address N/A N/A N/A N/A

TX Group 1 1 1 1

TX Link ID 0 1 2 3

TX ATM Address N/A N/A N/A N/A

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-80. IMA All Facilities Provisioning Screen

The IMA All Facilities Provisioning screen fields are shown in Table 5-82

.

Field

Operation Mode

RX Group

RX Link ID

TX Group

TX Link ID

Table 5-82. IMA All Facilities Provisioning Screen Fields

RX ATM Address

TX ATM Address

Description

This field displays the operation mode for the IMA facility. For more information, refer to

“Operation Mode for Facility Menu”

on page

5-118.

This field displays the IMA Group ID being received from the Far

End for the facility.

This field displays the Link ID received from the Far End for the facility.

This field displays the receive ATM address. This field is applicable in Pass Thru mode only.

This field displays the IMA Group transmit ID.

This field displays the Link ID transmitting to Far End for the facility.

This field displays the transmit ATM address. This field is applicable in Pass Thru mode only.

61179641AL1-5C 5-117

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Operation Mode for Facility Menu

Operation Mode for Facility

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Provisioning

\

IMA Facility Provisioning \

IMA All Facilities Provisioning \Operation

Mode for Facility\

The Operation Mode for Facility menu (see Figure 5-81

) provides options for the operation mode for each IMA facility.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Operation Mode for Facility for # 1 IMA_Group

1. IMA_Group

2. Unassigned

3. Pass Thru

'N' - Next IMA Facility 'P' - Previous IMA Facility

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-81. Operation Mode for Facility Menu

The Operation Mode for Facility menu options are shown in Table 5-83

.

Option Description

1 IMA_Group

2 Unassigned

3

Table 5-83. Operation Mode for Facility Menu Options

Pass Thru

Function

This option is used to add a facility to the IMA group.

This option is used to remove a facility from the IMA group.

This option is only available for facility #1. This option is used to allow ATM transport over a single facility without the IMA layer.

5-118 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Group Provisioning Menu

IMA Group Provisioning

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Provisioning

\IMA Group Provisioning\

The IMA Group Provisioning menu (see

Figure 5-82 ) is used to provision the IMA Group. An

IMA Group is a collection of physical links bundled together.

NOTE

The IMA Group must be Out of Service-Unassigned in order to change the provisioning options.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Group Provisioning

1. Group Operation Mode OOS - Unassigned

2. IMA Transmit ID (0-255) 101

3. IMA TX Frame Length 128

4. Min. TX Active Links 1

5. Min. RX Active Links 1

6. Max. Link Diff. Delay (0-100) 100

7. Group Version Version 1.1

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-82. IMA Group Provisioning Menu

The IMA Group Provisioning menu options are shown in

Table 5-84 .

Table 5-84. IMA Group Provisioning Menu Options

Option Description

1 Group Operation Mode

Function

The IMA Group must be Out of Service-Unassigned in order to change the options. If the IMA Group is In

Service or Out of Service-Maintenance, only the Group

Operation Mode is available for changes.

The Group Operation Mode settings are as follows:

• Out of Service-Unassigned

• Out of Service-Maintenance

• In Service

61179641AL1-5C 5-119

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Option Description

2 IMA Transmit ID

3

4

5

6

7

Table 5-84. IMA Group Provisioning Menu Options (Continued)

IMA TX Frame Length

Min. TX Active Links

Min. RX Active Links

Max. Link Diff. Delay

Group Version

Function

Each IMA Group has an overall ID transmitted to the other end. The IMA Transmit ID is different from the

Link ID.

The IMA Transmit ID settings are from 0 to 255. The default is 101.

This field displays the size of the IMA frame. For example, for a 128 frame length, there are 127 data cells and one IMA Control Protocol (ICP) cell.

The IMA TX Frame Length settings are as follows:

• 32

• 64

• 128 (default)

• 256

This field displays the minimum number of transfer links necessary for the IMA Group to be considered active.

The Minimum TX Active Links settings are from 1 to 4.

The default is 1.

This field displays the minimum number of receive links necessary for the IMA Group to be considered active.

The Minimum RX Active Links settings are from 1 to 4.

The default is 1.

This field displays the maximum delay allowed between individual links in the IMA Group.

The Maximum Link Differential Delay settings are from 0 to 100 ms. The default is 100 ms.

This field displays the IMA group version. Version 1.1 supports both versions 1.0 an 1.1, with automatic fallback from version 1.1 to 1.0 with legacy IMA equipment.

The Group Version settings are Version 1.0 (ALT) or

Version 1.1. The default is Version 1.1.

5-120 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Shortcut Setup Menu

IMA Shortcut Setup

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Provisioning

\IMA Shortcut Setup\

The IMA Shortcut Setup menu (see

Figure 5-83 ) provides shortcuts to facilitate provisioning

all of the IMA links simultaneously. To provision IMA links individually, refer to “IMA Facility

Provisioning Menu” on page 5-116.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Shortcut Setup

1. Force All Facilities Into Unassigned

2. Force Facility - 1 Into Pass Through

3. Force All Facilities Into IMA Group 1

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-83. IMA Shortcut Setup Menu

The IMA Shortcut Setup menu options are shown in

Table 5-85 .

Table 5-85. IMA Shortcut Setup Menu Options

Option Description

1 Force All Facilities Into

Unassigned

2

3

Force Facility - 1 Into Pass

Through

Force All Facilities Into IMA

Group 1

Function

This option forces all facilities to be set to the Out of

Service-Unassigned state. The T1s cannot link up to the network.

This option forces Facility #1 to Pass Through and forces all other Facilities to Out of Service-Unassigned. This option is used to allow ATM transport over a single facility (#1) without the IMA layer.

This option forces all traffic to go through IMA Group 1 and all four IMA links to train up to the upstream device.

61179641AL1-5C 5-121

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

IMA Scrambler Menu

IMA Scrambler

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Provisioning

\IMA Scrambler\

The IMA Scrambler menu (see

Figure 5-84

) is used to enable or disable scrambling. Scrambling is designed to randomize the pattern of 1s and 0s carried in ATM cells. Randomizing the digital bits can prevent continuous, non-variable bit patterns (i.e., long strings of all 1s or all

0s). Several physical layer protocols rely on transitions between 1s and 0s to maintain clocking.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Scrambler: Disabled

1. Enable

2. Disable

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-84. IMA Scrambler Menu

The IMA Scrambler menu options are shown in

Table 5-86 .

Option Description

1

2

Enable

Disable

Table 5-86. IMA Scrambler Menu Options

Function

This option enables scrambling.

This option disables scrambling.

5-122 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Restore IMA Factory Defaults Menu

Restore IMA Factory Defaults

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Provisioning

\Restore IMA Factory Defaults\

The Restore IMA Factory Defaults menu (see Figure 5-85 ) is used to reset the IMA provisioning

settings to factory defaults.

CAUTION

Depending on the system settings, this action can be service affecting. If the system is accessed remotely through a static IP address, the system resets and access is lost.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Restore IMA Factory Defaults

1. Yes - Service Affecting

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-85. Restore IMA Factory Defaults Menu

The Restore IMA Factory Defaults menu option is shown in Table 5-87

.

Table 5-87. Restore IMA Factory Defaults Menu Option

Option Definition

1 Yes - Service Affecting

Function

This option restores all options to the IMA factory default settings.

61179641AL1-5C 5-123

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Status/Failure Monitoring Menu

Status/Failure Monitoring

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\Status/Failure Monitoring\

The Total Access 1248 system tracks Failure Monitoring (FM) for the IMA group and each of

the links. The Status/Failure Monitoring menu (see Figure 5-86

) provides two options that display information about transmitting and receiving states, receiving failure, relative delay, receiving Loss of IMA Framing (LIF) defect, receiving Link Out of Delay Synchronization

(LODS), receiving defect, and the receiving link identifier for all facilities.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Status / Failure Monitoring

1. Group FM Status

2. All Links FM Status

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-86. Status/Failure Monitoring Menu

The Status/Failure Monitoring menu options are shown in Table 5-88

.

Option Description

1 Group FM Status

2

Table 5-88. Status/Failure Monitoring Menu Options

All Links FM Status

Function

This option displays the

“IMA Group 1 Failure

Monitoring Status Screen” on page 5-125.

This option displays the

“IMA Link Failure Monitoring

Status Screen” on page 5-127.

5-124 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status Screen

IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

Status/Failure Monitoring \IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status\

The IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status screen (see

Figure 5-87

) displays the status of the group state and the Near End and Far End failure status.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status

NE Group State : Operational

FE Group State : Operational

NE Failure Status : No Failure

FE Failure Status : No Failure

Link With Least Delay :

Max Link Differential Delay :

Configured TX Links : 4

Active Tx Links : 4

Configured RX Links : 4

Active Rx Links : 4

FE Failure Data : Available

FE Frame Length : 128

Group Version : Version 1.1

Timing Source : Port 1

Last Timing Source Change : MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-87. IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status Screen

The IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status screen fields are shown in Table 5-89

.

Table 5-89. IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status Screen Fields

Field

NE Group State

FE Group State

NE Failure Status

FE Failure Status

Link With Least Delay

Max Link Differential Delay

Configured TX Links

Active Tx Links

Configured RX Links

Description

This field displays the Near End group status.

This field displays the Far End group status.

This field displays the Near End failure status.

This field displays the Far End failure status.

This field displays the link with the least delay.

This field displays the maximum link differential delay.

This field displays the number of transmitting links that are configured.

This field displays the number of transmitting links that are active.

This field displays the number of receiving links that are configured.

61179641AL1-5C 5-125

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-89. IMA Group 1 Failure Monitoring Status Screen Fields (Continued)

Field

Active Rx Links

FE Failure Data

FE Frame Length

Group Version

Timing Source

Last Timing Source Change

Description

This field displays the number of receiving links that are active.

This field displays the Far End failure data.

This field displays the Far End frame length.

This field displays the group version.

This field displays the port that is currently providing the T1 reference timing.

This field provides a timestamp for when the T1 reference timing is changed.

5-126 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen

IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

Status/Failure Monitoring \IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status\

The IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status screen (see Figure 5-88

) displays the states for all of the facilities.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status

Fac1 Fac2 Fac3 Fac4

NE Tx State: Active Active Active Active

NE Rx State: Active Active Active Active

FE Tx State: Active Active Active Active

FE Rx State: Active Active Active Active

NE Rx Failure: NoFault NoFault NoFault NoFault

FE Rx Failure: NoFault NoFault NoFault NoFault

DiffDelay(ms): >MaxDel >MaxDel >MaxDel >MaxDel

Rx LIF Defect:

Rx LODS Defect:

Rx Link ID: 0 1 2 3

Timing Source : Port 1

Last Timing Source Change : MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-88. IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen

The IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status screen states and failure conditions are shown in

Table 5-90

.

Table 5-90. IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen

States and Failure Conditions

Failure Condition State Definition

Near End Tx States

NotInGr Not In Group, Unassigned

Deleted

Fault

No Reas

Not In Group, Deleted

Unusable, Fault

Unusable

This condition indicates that no information about the link exists.

This condition indicates the link has been removed from the group.

This transitional state ensures that the other end is still not receiving ATM layer cells before it moves to the

Unassigned state.

This condition indicates that a fault has been detected either on the link or in the link protocol.

This condition indicates that a reason was not given.

61179641AL1-5C 5-127

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

State

Usable

Active

Table 5-90. IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen

States and Failure Conditions (Continued)

Definition

Usable

Active

Failure Condition

This condition indicates that the link is ready to be used and is awaiting the FE to activate its receiver before sending any ATM layer cells.

IMA frames containing only filler cells are being transmitted; but the link is not in a data round-robin state.

This condition indicates that the link is capable of passing cells from the ATM layer.

The IMA transmitter considers the link to be in a data round-robin state.

Near End Rx States

NotInGr Not In Group, Unassigned

Deleted

Blocked

Fault

Usable

Active

Not In Group, Deleted

Unusable, Blocked

Unusable, Fault

Usable

Active

This condition indicates that no information about the link exists.

This condition indicates that the link has been removed from the group.

This transitional state ensures that the other end is still not receiving ATM layer cells before it moves to the

Unassigned state.

This condition allows for a graceful transition to

Unusable from the Active state without loss of ATM layer cells.

This condition indicates that a fault has been detected either on the link or in the link protocol.

This condition indicates that the link is ready to be used for receiving ATM layer cells and it is awaiting the FE Tx to be Usable or Active before moving into the Active state.

The link has been synchronized with the other receive links already in the Usable or Active state.

The IMA receiver considers the link to not be in a data round-robin state.

This condition indicates that the link is capable of passing cells to the ATM layer.

The IMA receiver considers this link to be in a data round-robin state.

Far End Tx States

NotInGr Not In Group, Unassigned This condition indicates that no information about the link exists.

5-128 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

State

Deleted

Fault

Misconn

Inhibit

Usable

Active

Table 5-90. IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen

States and Failure Conditions (Continued)

Definition

Not In Group, Deleted

Unusable, Fault

Unusable, Mis-connected

Unusable, Inhibited

Usable

Active

Failure Condition

This condition indicates that the link has been removed from the group.

This transitional state ensures that the other end is still not receiving ATM layer cells before it moves to the

Unassigned state.

This condition indicates that a fault has been detected either on the link or in the link protocol.

This condition indicates that mis-connectivity has been found as a result of a test.

This condition indicates that operation of the link is blocked for a locally defined application or implementation dependent reason.

The link may otherwise be used.

This condition indicates that the link is ready to be used, it is awaiting the FE to activate its receiver before sending any ATM layer cells.

IMA frames containing only filler cells are being transmitted, but the link is not in a data round-robin state.

This condition indicates that the link is capable of passing cells from the ATM layer.

The IMA transmitter considers the link to be in a data round-robin state.

Far End Rx States

NotInGr Not In Group, Unassigned

Deleted

Failed

Fault

Blocked

No Reas

Not In Group, Deleted

Unusable, Failed

Unusable, Fault

Unusable, Blocked

Unusable

This condition indicates that no information about the link exists.

This condition indicates that the link has been removed from the group.

This transitional state ensures that the other end is still not receiving ATM layer cells before it moves to the

Unassigned state.

This condition indicates that the receiver has failed due to the persistence of a defined defect.

Examples of defects are LCD, LIF, and LODS.

This condition indicates that a fault has been detected either on the link or in the link protocol.

Allows a graceful transition into Unusable from Active state without loss of ATM layer cells.

This condition indicates that a reason was not given.

61179641AL1-5C 5-129

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-90. IMA Link Failure Monitoring Status Screen

States and Failure Conditions (Continued)

State

Usable

Active

Definition

Usable

Active

Failure Condition

This condition indicates that the link is ready to be used for receiving ATM layer cells and it is awaiting the FE Tx to be Usable or Active before moving into the Active state.

The link has been synchronized with the other receive links already in the Usable or Active state.

The IMA receiver considers the link to not be in a data round-robin state.

This condition indicates that the link is capable of passing cells to the ATM layer.

The IMA receiver considers this link to be in a data round-robin state.

Near End and Far End Rx Failure

Failure

LIF

LODS

Misconn

Inhibit

Blocked

Fault

FeTx UU

FeRx UU

NoFault

Failure

Loss of IMA Framing

Link Out of Delay

Synchronization

Mis-connectivity

Inhibit

This condition indicates that a reason was not given.

This condition indicates a loss of IMA framing.

This condition indicates a link out of delay synchronization.

This condition indicates that mis-connectivity has been found as a result of a test.

This condition indicates that operation of the link is blocked for some locally defined application or implementation dependant reason.

The link may be used for testing.

Blocked

Fault

This condition indicates a transition into the unusable state without loss of ATM layer cells.

This condition indicates a fault on the link or in the link protocol.

Far End Transmit Unusable This condition indicates that the Far End transmitter is in the unusable state.

Far End Receive Unusable This condition indicates that the Far End receiver is in the unusable state.

No fault This condition indicates that there is no current failure condition.

5-130 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Loopback Menu

IMA Loopback

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\IMA Loopback\

The IMA Loopback menu (see

Figure 5-89 ) is used to initiate loopbacks for testing the IMA

group. Each IMA Loopback menu option can be enabled or disabled.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Loopback Menu

1. Data Lpbk Towards Network DISABLED

2. ATM Lpbk Towards Network DISABLED

3. ATM Lpbk Towards Customer DISABLED

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-89. IMA Loopback Menu

The IMA Loopback menu options are shown in

Table 5-91

.

Table 5-91. IMA Loopback Menu Options

Option

1

2

3

Description

Data Lpbk Towards Network

Function

This option when enabled is used to perform a data loopback toward the network.

ATM Lpbk Towards Network This option when enabled is used to perform an ATM loopback toward the network.

ATM Lpbk Towards Customer This option when enabled is used to perform an ATM loopback toward the customer.

61179641AL1-5C 5-131

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

IMA Performance Monitoring Menu

IMA Performance Monitoring

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\IMA Performance Monitoring\

The IMA Performance Monitoring menu (see

Figure 5-90 ) is used to track the Total Access

1248 system performance statistics for the IMA groups.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Performance Monitoring

1. IMA Group PM

2. Facilities PM

3. Clear All IMA Links PM

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-90. IMA Performance Monitoring Menu

The IMA Performance Monitoring menu options are show in

Table 5-92 .

Table 5-92. IMA Performance Monitoring Menu Options

Option Description

1 IMA Group PM

2

3

Facilities PM

Clear All IMA Links PM

Function

This option displays the “IMA Group 1 Performance

Monitoring Status Screen” on page 5-133.

This option displays the “IMA Performance Monitoring

Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data Screen” on page 5-

135.

This option is used to clear all the IMA performance monitoring data for all of the IMA links.

5-132 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen

IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status

Main Menu \

Network Port

\

IMA Main Menu

\

IMA Performance Monitoring \IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status\

The IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status screen displays IMA group performance

monitoring statistics in 24-hour and 15-minute increments, as shown in Figure 5-91

.

NOTE

The IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status screen can be cleared by selecting C . All statistics are cleared without additional prompting.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status

TIIS UAS NEF FEF TxAvail RxAvail

24 Hr - Current 11750 11750 0 0 0 0

--/-- - - - - - -

15 Min - Current 491 491 0 0 0 0

16:30 900 900 0 0 0 0

16:15 900 900 0 0 0 0

16:00 900 900 0 0 0 0

15:45 900 900 0 0 0 0

15:30 900 900 0 0 0 0

15:15 900 900 0 0 0 0

15:00 900 900 0 0 0 0

14:45 900 900 0 0 0 0

B - Backward(2hrs/15min PM) F - Forward(2hrs/15min PM)

C - Clear PM Stats

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-91. IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen

The IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status screen fields are shown in Table 5-93

.

Field

TIIS

UAS

NEF

FEF

TxAvail

RxAvail

Table 5-93. IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the Time In Interval Seconds.

This field displays the Group Unavailable Seconds.

This field displays the Group Near End Failures.

This field displays the Group Far End Failures.

This field displays the Transmit Available cell rate.

This field displays the Receive Available cell rate.

61179641AL1-5C 5-133

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

The IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status screen hot keys are defined in

Table 5-94. IMA Group 1 Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

B Backward (2hrs/15min PM)

C

F

Clear PM Stats

Forward (2hrs/15min PM)

Function

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

5-134 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data Screen

IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data

Main Menu

\

Network Port

\ IMA Main Menu \

IMA Performance Monitoring \IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM

Data\

The IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data screen displays IMA performance monitoring for IMA facilities in 24-hour and 15-minute increments, as shown in

Figure 5-92 .

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data

SES UAS TxUS RxUS TxFail RxFail

24 Hr - Current 0 11785 11784 11784 0 0

--/-- - - - - - -

15 Min - Current 0 587 587 587 0 0

16:30 0 900 900 900 0 0

16:15 0 900 900 900 0 0

16:00 0 900 900 900 0 0

15:45 0 900 900 900 0 0

15:30 0 900 900 900 0 0

15:15 0 900 900 900 0 0

15:00 0 900 900 900 0 0

14:45 0 900 900 900 0 0

B - Backward(2hrs/15min PM) F - Forward(2hrs/15min PM) T - Near/Far End PM

S - Select Port P - Previous Port N - Next Port C - Clear PM Stats

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-92. IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1

Near End Data Screen

Field

SES

UAS

TxUS

RxUS

TxFail

RxFail

The IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1 Near End PM Data screen fields are shown

in Table 5-95

.

Table 5-95. IMA Performance Monitoring Status Facility 1

Near End PM Data Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the Severely Errored Seconds.

This field displays the Unavailable Seconds.

This field displays the Transmit Unusable Seconds.

This field displays the Receive Unusable Seconds.

This field displays the Transmit Failure cell rate.

This field displays the Receive Failure cell rate.

The IMA Facilities hot keys are defined in Table 5-96

.

61179641AL1-5C 5-135

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

C

F

S

T

P

N

Table 5-96. IMA Performance Monitoring Status Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

B Backward (2hrs/15min PM)

Clear PM Stats

Forward (2hrs/15min PM)

Previous Port

Next Port

Select Port

Near/Far End PM

Function

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

This hot key is used to toggle between the Near End and

Far End performance monitoring data.

5-136 61179641AL1-5C

T1/E1 Menu

T1/E1 Menu

Main Menu \

Network Port

\T1/E1 Menu\

The T1/E1 menu (see

Figure 5-93 ) is used to specify either a T1 or E1 interface.

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

T1/E1 T1

1. T1

2. E1

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-93. T1/E1 Menu

61179641AL1-5C 5-137

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

DSL Menus

DSL Menus

Main Menu \DSL Menus\

Each of the 48 DSL lines has a number of settings that can be provisioned. These settings affect the performance of the line. The class of service to be provisioned on the line and the type of modem at the distant end must be considered. DSL provisioning is accomplished by building profiles and then assigning them to the individual lines or groups of lines. Port provisioning is used to turn lines on and off and configure link down alarms. The DSL Menus break down the ADSL options between provisioning, status, performance, and the Dual Ended Loop

Test (DELT) (see Figure 5-94

).

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

DSL Menus

1. ADSL Provisioning

2. ADSL Status

3. ADSL Performance

4. DELT menus

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-94. DSL Menus

The DSL Menus menu options are shown in Table 5-97

.

Option Description

1 ADSL Provisioning

2

3

4

ADSL Status

DELT menus

Table 5-97. DSL Menus Menu Options

ADSL Performance

Function

This option displays the “DSL Provisioning Menu” on page 5-139.

This option displays the “Status Menu” on page

5-159.

This option displays the “Performance Menu” on page 5-

166.

This option displays the

“ADSL DELT Menus” on page 5-

169.

5-138 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

DSL Provisioning Menu

DSL Provisioning

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \DSL Provisioning\

The DSL Provisioning menu (see Figure 5-95

) provides options to provision the DSL profiles and restore the ADSL provisioning information.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

DSL Provisioning

1. DSL Profiles

2. Alarm Profiles

3. Port Provisioning

4. Restore ADSL Provisioning

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-95. DSL Provisioning Menu

The DSL Provisioning menu options are as shown in

Table 5-98 .

Option Description

1 DSL Profiles

2

3

4

Table 5-98. DSL Provisioning Menu Options

Alarm Profiles

Port Provisioning

Restore ADSL Provisioning

Function

This option displays the “ADSL Profiles Menu” on page 5-140.

This option displays the “Alarm Profiles Menu” on page 5-144.

This option displays the “Port Provisioning Menu” on page 5-147.

This option displays the “ADSL Restore Menu” on page 5-153.

61179641AL1-5C 5-139

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ADSL Profiles Menu

ADSL Profiles

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \ADSL Profiles\

The ADSL Profiles menu (see Figure 5-96

) is used to apply a set of values to several objects at the same time. At initial setup, all lines are set to the default values using the “DEFVAL” profile, which cannot be deleted or edited. Use the hot keys at the bottom of the screen to view, create, edit, and delete additional profiles.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Page 1 of 96 Total Profiles: 2

ADSL Profiles

Profile Name and Assigned Ports State

1. DEFVAL Active

Host: 1-48

Client 1: (Not Present) 1-48

Client 2: (Not Present) 1-48

Client 3: (Not Present) 1-48

2. Custom Name Inactive

Host: None

Client 1: (Not Present) None

Client 2: (Not Present) None

Client 3: (Not Present) None

'c' to Create a new profile 'e' to Edit a profile 'd' to Delete a profile

'v' to view profile 'p' for previous page 'n' for next page

's' to select page

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-96. ADSL Profiles Menu

The ADSL Profiles hot keys are defined in Table 5-99 .

S

V to Select profile to View page

Table 5-99. ADSL Profiles Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

C

D

E

N

P to Create a new profile to Delete a profile to Edit a profile for Next page for Previous page

Function

This hot key is used to create a new profile.

This hot key is used to delete a specified profile.

This hot key is used to modify a specified profile.

This hot key is used to display the next profile screen.

This hot key is used to display the previous profile screen.

This hot key is used to display a specific page.

This hot key is used to display a specified profile.

5-140 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Figure 5-97 displays an example of the Edit ADSL Profiles menu. See Table 5-100 on page 5-

141 for details on ADSL line options.

NOTE

The Custom Name reference indicates the user assigned profile name.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Profile Settings for: Custom Name

1. State: Inactive

2. Host : None

3. Client 1 : (Not Present) None

4. Client 2 : (Not Present) None

5. Client 3 : (Not Present) None

6. Rate Mode: Rate Adaptive 7. Line Type: Fast

Downstream Upstream

8. Target SNR Margin 6 dB 16. Target SNR Margin 6 dB

9. Max SNR Margin 9 dB 17. Max SNR Margin 9 dB

10. Min SNR Margin 0 dB 18. Min SNR Margin 0 dB

11. Fast Max Tx Rate 8160 kbps 19. Fast Max Tx Rate 896 kbps

12. Fast Min Tx Rate 32 kbps 20. Fast Min Tx Rate 32 kbps

13. Interleave Max Tx Rate N/A 21. Interleave Max Tx Rate N/A

14. Interleave Min Tx Rate N/A 22. Interleave Min Tx Rate N/A

15. Interleave Max Delay N/A 23. Interleave Max Delay N/A

Selection :

NOTE: Changes will only be saved when profile changes states!

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-97. Edit ADSL Profile Menu

The Edit ADSL Profile menu options are shown in Table 5-100

.

Option Description

1 State

2

3

4

Host

Client 1

Client 2

Table 5-100. Edit ADSL Profile Menu Options

Function

This option is used to assign a state to the profile.

This option is used to assign a port to the profile for the host unit.

This option is used to assign a port to a profile for the first client unit, if enabled.

This option is used to assign a port to a profile for the second client unit, if enabled.

Settings

Active; Inactive

1-48

1-48

1-48

Default

Inactive

None

None

None

61179641AL1-5C 5-141

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-100. Edit ADSL Profile Menu Options (Continued)

Option Description

5 Client 3

6

7

Rate Mode

Line Type

Function

This option is used to assign a port to a profile for the third client unit, if enabled.

This option is used to select the rate mode.

• Fixed rate provides a fixed transmission speed.

• Rate adaptive determines the transfer rate, which allows the line to be used at a greater distance.

This option is used to select the line type.

Settings

1-48

Fixed; Rate Adaptive

Interleave; Fast

Downstream Options

8 Target SNR

Margin

9 Max SNR

Margin

10

11

Min SNR

Margin

Fast Channel

Max Tx Rate

This option indicates the Target

Signal to Noise ratio in dB.

This option indicates the

Maximum Signal to Noise ratio allowed.

This option indicates the

Minimum Signal to Noise ratio allowed.

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Fast.

0 dB to 15 dB

0 dB to 31 dB

0 dB to 31 dB

12

13

14

15

Fast Channel

Min Tx Rate

Interleave

Channel Max

Tx Rate

Interleave

Channel Min Tx

Rate

Interleave

Channel Max

Delay

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Fast and the Rate Mode is set to

Rate Adaptive.

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Interleave.

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Interleave and the Rate Mode is set to Rate Adaptive.

The maximum delay allowed for the Interleaving of data. This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Interleave.

ADSL:

32 kbps to 8160 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 32736 kbps

ADSL:

32 kbps to 8160 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 32736 kbps

ADSL:

32 kbps to 8160 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 32736 kbps

ADSL:

32 kbps to 8160 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 32736 kbps

1 ms to 63 ms

Default

None

Rate

Adaptive

Fast

6 dB

9 dB

0 dB

8160 kbps

32 kbps

7616 kbps

32 kbps

16 ms

5-142 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

18

19

Table 5-100. Edit ADSL Profile Menu Options (Continued)

Option Description

Upstream Options

16 Target SNR

Margin

17 Max SNR

Margin

Min SNR

Margin

Fast Channel

Max Tx Rate

Function

This option indicates the Target

Signal to Noise ratio in dB.

This option indicates the

Maximum Signal to Noise ratio allowed.

This option indicates the

Minimum Signal to Noise ratio allowed.

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Fast.

Settings

0 dB to 15 dB

0 dB to 31 dB

0 dB to 31 dB

20

21

22

23

Fast Channel

Min

Tx Rate

Interleave

Channel Max

Tx Rate

Interleave

Channel Min Tx

Rate

Interleave

Channel Max

Delay

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Fast and the Rate Mode is set to

Rate Adaptive.

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Interleave.

This option is only available when the Link Type is set to

Interleave and the Rate Mode is set to Rate Adaptive.

This option is used to set the maximum delay allowed for the

Interleaving of data. This option is only available when the Link

Type is set to Interleave.

ADSL:

32 kbps to 1024 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 2048 kbps

ADSL:

32 kbps to 1024 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 2048 kbps

ADSL:

32 kbps to 1024 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 2048 kbps

ADSL:

32 kbps to 1024 kbps

ADSL2+:

32 kbps to 2048 kbps

1 ms to 63 ms

Default

6 dB

9 dB

0 dB

896 kbps

32 kbps

896 kbps

32 kbps

16 ms

61179641AL1-5C 5-143

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Alarm Profiles Menu

Alarm Profiles

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \Alarm Profiles\

Alarm options for the DSL lines are completed by setting up profiles using the Alarm Profiles

menu (see Figure 5-98 ). At initial set up all ports are set to the default values in the “DEFVAL”

profile. This profile cannot be deleted or edited. Use the hot keys at the bottom of the menu to view, create, edit, or delete profiles.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Page 1 of 96 Total Profiles: 2

Alarm Profiles

Profile Name and Assigned Ports State

1. DEFVAL Active

Host: 1-48

Client 1: (Not Present) 1-48

Client 2: (Not Present) 1-48

Client 3: (Not Present) 1-48

2. Custom Name Inactive

Host: None

Client 1: (Not Present) None

Client 2: (Not Present) None

Client 3: (Not Present) None

'c' to Create a new profile 'e' to Edit a profile 'd' to Delete a profile

'v' to view profile 'p' for previous page 'n' for next page

's' to select page

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-98. Alarm Profiles Menu

From the Alarm Profile menu, press

C

to create a new profile. Enter the name of the new profile, and press E NTER

. This returns the Settings for Profile: Custom Name screen (see

Figure 5-99 ).

NOTE

The Custom Name reference indicates the user assigned profile name.

5-144 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Profile Settings for: Custom Name

1. State: Inactive

2. Host : None

3. Client 1 : (Not Present) None

4. Client 2 : (Not Present) None

5. Client 3 : (Not Present) None

Downstream Upstream

6. LOS Secs Disabled 8. LOS Secs Disabled

7. ES Secs Disabled 9. ES Secs Disabled

Selection :

NOTE: Changes will only be saved when profile changes states!

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-99. Profile Settings for: Custom Name Menu

The Profile Settings for: Custom Name menu options are as shown in Table 5-101

.

Option Description

1

2

State

Host

3

4

5

6

7

Table 5-101. Profile Settings for: Custom Name Menu Options

Client 1

Client 2

Client 3

LOS Secs (Downstream)

ES Secs (Downstream)

Function

This option is used to assign a state to the profile.

This option is used to assign a port to the profile for the host unit.

This option is used to assign a port to a profile for the first client unit, if enabled.

This option is used to assign a port to a profile for the second client unit, if enabled.

This option is used to assign a port to a profile for the third client unit, if enabled.

The Loss of Signal Seconds (LOS Secs) option is used to configure downstream traffic. Valid values are 0 to 900 seconds. This option is disabled by setting the value to zero.

The Errored Seconds (ES Secs) option is used to configure downstream traffic. Valid values are 0 to 900 seconds. This option is disabled by setting the value to zero.

61179641AL1-5C 5-145

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Option Description

8 LOS Secs (Upstream)

9

Table 5-101. Profile Settings for: Custom Name Menu Options (Continued)

ES Secs (Upstream)

Function

The Loss of Signal Seconds (LOS Secs) option is used to configure upstream traffic. Valid values are 0 to 900 seconds. This option is disabled by setting the value to zero.

The Errored Seconds (ES Secs) option is used to configure upstream traffic. Valid values are 0 to 900 seconds. This option is disabled by setting the value to zero.

5-146 61179641AL1-5C

Port Provisioning Menu

Port Provisioning

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \Port Provisioning\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-100

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the Port

Provisioning menu.

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (configured)

3. Client 2 (configured)

4. Client 3 (configured)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-100. Select Shelf Menu

The Port Provisioning menu (see Figure 5-101

) is used to select and set the ADSL ports.

61179641AL1-5C 5-147

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Shelf = Host

Port Provisioning

1. Select Port 1

2. ADSL Card Service State In Service

3. Line Service State Out of Service-Maintenance

4. Service Mode Legacy Multimode (ADSL1)

5. Hamband Mask Disabled

6. Cabinet Mode Disabled

7. Link Down Alarm Disabled

8. Ports to apply changes 1-48

9. Apply Provisioning to Ports

Selection :

'N' - Next Port 'P' - Previous Port

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-101. Port Provisioning Menu

The Port Provisioning options are as shown in Table 5-102 .

Option Description

1 Select Port

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Table 5-102. Port Provisioning Menu Options

ADSL Card Service State

Line Service State

Service Mode

Hamband Mask

Cabinet Mode

Link Down Alarm

Ports to apply changes

Apply Provisioning to Ports

Function

This option is used to designate which port provisioning information is to be entered.

This option displays the “Service State for ADSL Card

Menu” on page 5-149.

This option displays the “Service State for Port: # Menu” on page 5-149.

This option displays the

“Service Mode for Port: # Menu” on page 5-150.

This option displays the “Hamband Mask for Port: #

Menu” on page 5-150.

This option displays the

“Cabinet Mode for Port: # Menu” on page 5-151.

This option displays the “Link Down Alarm for Port: #

Menu” on page 5-152.

This option is used to designate the specific ports to which all changes are to be made.

This option is used to apply port provisioning to the specific ports defined in the Ports to apply changes option.

5-148 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

NOTE

Use N for next port or P for previous port to select the port to be provisioned.

Service State for ADSL Card Menu

Service State for ADSL Card

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

Port Provisioning \Service State for ADSL Card\

The ADSL Card Service State option on the Port Provisioning Menu

displays the Service State for ADSL Card menu, which refers to the ADSL card that is located on the main circuit board of the Total Access 1248 system.

The Service State for ADSL Card menu options are shown in

Table 5-103 .

Table 5-103. Service State for ADSL Card Menu Options

Option Description

1 In Service

2

3

Out of Service-Unassigned

Out of Service-Maintenance

Function

This setting indicates that ADSL services are available, if installed, and Link Down and Threshold alarms are reported, if enabled.

This setting indicates that no ADSL services are available and Link Down and Threshold alarms are not reported.

This setting indicates that ADSL services are available and Link Down and Threshold alarms are not reported.

Service State for Port: # Menu

Service State for Port: #

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

Port Provisioning \Service State for Port: #\

The Line Service State option on the

Port Provisioning Menu

displays the Service State for Port

# menu. The # represents the value displayed for the Select Port option. The default value for the Line Service State is Out of Service-Maintenance.

The Service State for Port: # menu options are shown in Table 5-104 .

Table 5-104. Service State for Port: # Menu Options

Option Description

1 In Service

2

3

Out of Service-Unassigned

Out of Service-Maintenance

Function

This setting indicates that an ADSL modem is allowed to train up and alarms are reported, if enabled.

This setting indicates that an ADSL modem is not allowed to train up and alarms are not reported.

This setting indicates that an ADSL modem is allowed to train up and alarms are not reported.

61179641AL1-5C 5-149

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Service Mode for Port: # Menu

Service Mode for Port: #

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

Port Provisioning \Service Mode for Port: #\

The Service Mode option on the Port Provisioning Menu

displays the Service Mode for Port: # menu. The # represents the value displayed for the Select Port option. The service mode refers to the data mode for the traffic between the DSLAM and the modem.

The Service Mode for Port: # menu options are shown in Table 5-105

.

Option Description

1 Multimode

7

8

5

6

9

2

3

4

T1.413

G.dmt

G.lite

Table 5-105. Service Mode for Port: # Menu Options

ADSL2

ADSL2.lite

ADSL2+

READSL

Legacy Multimode (ADSL1)

Function

Multimode allows the DSLAM and the modem to pick a mode for the line to use to train up.

This option sets T1.413 as the Service Mode.

This option sets G.dmt as the Service Mode.

This option sets G.lite as the Service Mode. If the mode is set to G.lite, the Line Type should be set to Interleave

from the “ADSL Profiles Menu” on page 5-140 for these

ports. Even if the Line Type remains set to Fast, the modem can only train up as Interleave.

This option sets ADSL2 as the Service Mode.

This option sets ADSL2.lite as the Service Mode.

This option sets ADSL2+ as the Service Mode.

This option sets READSL as the Service Mode.

This option sets Legacy Multimode as the Service Mode.

If a mode is specified, it must be one supported by the customer’s modem.

Hamband Mask for Port: # Menu

Hamband Mask for Port: #

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

Port Provisioning \Hamband Mask for Port: #\

The Hamband Mask option on the Port Provisioning Menu

displays the Hamband Mask for

Port: # menu. The # represents the value displayed for the Select Port option. Hamband Mask is for masking out frequencies that are used by hamband (ham radios) so that those frequencies and their respective tones do not interrupt the training process.

The Hamband Mask for Port: # menu options are shown in Table 5-106

.

5-150 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Table 5-106. Hamband Mask for Port: # Menu Options

Option Description

1 Enabled

2 Disabled

Function

This option enables hamband masking.

This option disables hamband masking.

Cabinet Mode for Port: # Menu

Cabinet Mode for Port: #

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

Port Provisioning \Cabinet Mode for Port: #\

The Cabinet Mode option on the

Port Provisioning Menu

displays the Cabinet Mode for Port: #

menu (see Figure 5-102

). The # represents the value displayed for the Select Port option. This option permits the ADSL2+ line to only use downstream tones beginning at Tone 110, 130, and 250. The Cabinet Mode should only be enabled when using ADSL2+ capable modems.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Cabinet Mode For Port:1

1. Disabled

2. Enabled - (Tone 250)

3. Enabled - (Tone 110)

4. Enabled - (Tone 130)

Selection :

NOTE: Cabinet Mode is only available on

ports provisioned as ADSL2+ or Multimode.

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-102. Cabinet Mode for Port # Menu

The Cabinet Mode for Port: # menu options are shown in Table 5-107 .

Table 5-107. Cabinet Mode for Port: # Menu Options

Option Description

3

4

1

2

Disabled

Enabled - Tone 250

Enabled - Tone 110

Enabled - Tone 130

Function

This option disables Cabinet Mode.

This option enables the downstream at Tone 250.

This option enables the downstream at Tone 110.

This option enables the downstream at Tone 130.

61179641AL1-5C 5-151

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Link Down Alarm for Port: # Menu

Link Down Alarm for Port: #

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

Port Provisioning \Link Down Alarm for Port: #\

The Link Down Alarm option on the

Port Provisioning Menu displays the Link Down Alarm for

Port: # menu. The # represents the value displayed for the Select Port option. The Link Down

Alarm option is used to enable and disable link down alarms. The default value is Disabled. If changed to Enabled, the system reports an alarm when the line to the customer is not trained up.

The Link Down Alarm for Port: # menu options are shown in Table 5-108 .

Option Description

1 Enabled

2

Table 5-108. Link Down Alarm for Port: # Menu Options

Disabled

Function

This option enables the system to report an alarm when the line to the customer is not trained up.

This option disables the Link Down Alarm option.

5-152 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

ADSL Restore Menu

ADSL Restore Menu

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \ADSL Restore Menu\

The ADSL Restore menu (see Figure 5-103

) provides options to restore all ADSL provisioning or select the DSP Management menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ADSL Restore Menu

1. ADSL Provisioning Restore

2. DSP Management Menu

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-103. ADSL Restore Menu

The ADSL Restore Menu options are shown in Table 5-109

.

Option Description

1 ADSL Provisioning Restore

2

Table 5-109. ADSL Restore Menu Options

DSP Management Menu

Displays

This option displays the “Reset all ADSL provisioning

Menu”. Selection of the Reset option from this menu will reset all ADSL provisioning and ADSL profiles back to their default settings.

This option displays the “DSP Management Menu” on page 5-154.

61179641AL1-5C 5-153

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

DSP Management Menu

DSP Management Menu

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

ADSL Restore Menu

\DSP Management Menu\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-104

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the DSP

Management menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (not present)

3. Client 2 (not present)

4. Client 3 (not present)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-104. Select Shelf Menu

The DSP Management menu (see Figure 5-105

) provides options to reset all or individual

DSPs, and enable/disable the Auto Warm Start feature. Auto Warm Start resets the hardware modules within the DSPs.

5-154 61179641AL1-5C

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

DSP Management Menu

1. Reset All DSPs and reload firmware

2. Reset DSPs without reloading firmware

3. Auto Warm Start ENABLED

4. Retrain Criteria

5. Exit

Selection :

Menu Descriptions

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-105. DSP Management Menu

The DSP Management menu options are shown in Table 5-110

.

Option Description

1 Reset All DSPs and reload firmware

2

3

4

5

Reset DSPs without reloading firmware

Auto Warm Start

Exit

Table 5-110. DSP Management Menu Options

Retrain Criteria

Displays

This option displays the “Reset all DSPs and reload firmware Menu”. Selection of the Reset option from this menu will reset all DSPs, reload them with firmware and force retrains on all ports.

This option displays the “Reset DSP Menu” on page 5-

156

This option toggles between Auto Warm Start ENABLED and Auto Warm Start DISABLED.

This option displays the “ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu” on page 5-157.

This option exits the “ADSL Restore Menu” and returns

to the “DSL Provisioning Menu” on page 5-139.

61179641AL1-5C 5-155

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Reset DSP Menu

Reset DSP

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

ADSL Restore Menu

\

DSP Management Menu

\Reset DSP\

The Reset DSP Menu (see Figure 5-106 ) selectively resets individual DSPs. Each DSP operates

eight ports as listed in the menu commentary when a DSP is selected.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Reset DSP

WARNING! THIS IS SERVICE AFFECTING!

This option will reset DSP 1 which operates

ports 7,8,21,22,23,24,39,40.

1. DSP: 1

2. Reset this DSP

3. Exit

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-106. Reset DSP Menu

The Reset DSP Menu options are shown in

Table 5-111 .

Option Description

1 DSP:

2

3

Reset this DSP

Exit

Table 5-111. Reset DSP Menu Options

Function

Selection of this option provides a text entry field for selection of the DSP to be reset.

This option resets the specified DSP and returns to the

“DSP Management Menu” on page 5-154.

This option returns to the “DSP Management Menu” on page 5-154.

5-156 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu

ADSL Retrain Criteria

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

DSL Provisioning \

ADSL Restore Menu

\

DSP Management Menu

\ADSL Retrain Criteria\

The ADSL Retrain Criteria menu (see

Figure 5-107 ) is used to select the conditions that will

force a retrain. A comprehensive count of retrains incurred and the error conditions that caused them is also provided.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ADSL Retrain Criteria - Port: 1

1. Retrain Margin NE ON

2. Retrain Margin FE ON

3. Retrain UAS-LNE OFF

4. Retrain UAS-LFE OFF

5. Retrain SES-FE OFF

Selection :

Retrained due to: SES NE: 0 SES FE: 0

UAS NE: 0 UAS FE: 0

Margin NE: 0 Margin FE: 0

'S' - Select Port 'N' - Next Port 'P' - Previous Port 'C' - Clear

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-107. ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu

The ADSL Retrain Criteria menu options are shown in

Table 5-112 .

Option Description

1 Retrain Margin NE

2

Table 5-112. ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu Options

Retrain Margin FE

Function

Selection of this option will force a retrain when the

Margin Near End is exceeded. Option selection toggles between On and Off.

Selection of this option will force a retrain when the

Margin Far End is exceeded. Option selection toggles between On and Off.

61179641AL1-5C 5-157

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-112. ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu Options (Continued)

Option Description

3 Retrain UAS-LNE

4

5

Retrain UAS-LFE

Retrain SES-FE

Function

Selection of this option will force a retrain when the

Unavailable Seconds on the Line Near End are exceeded.

Option selection toggles between On and Off.

Selection of this option will force a retrain when the

Unavailable Seconds on the Line Far End are exceeded.

Option selection toggles between On and Off.

Selection of this option will force a retrain when the

Severely Errored Seconds on the Far End are exceeded.

Option selection toggles between On and Off.

The ADSL Retrain Criteria menu hot keys are defined in Table 5-113 .

Table 5-113. ADSL Retrain Criteria Menu Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

C Clear

N

P

S

Next Port

Previous Port

Select Port

Function

This hot key resets all retrain counts to zero.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

5-158 61179641AL1-5C

Status Menu

Status

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \Status\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-108

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the Status menu.

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (configured)

3. Client 2 (configured)

4. Client 3 (configured)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-108. Select Shelf Menu

The Status menu (see Figure 5-109

) offers different options for ADSL status reporting.

61179641AL1-5C 5-159

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Shelf = Host

Status

1. ADSL Status

2. All ADSL Ports Status

3. ATU-R Information

4. BAT/SNR Tables

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-109. Status Menu

The Status menu options are as shown in

Table 5-114

.

Option Description

1 ADSL Status

2

3

4

ATU-R Information

BAT/SNR Tables

Table 5-114. Status Menu Options

All ADSL Ports Status

Function

This option displays the “ADSL Status Screen” on page 5-161.

This option displays the “ADSL Ports Status Screen” on page 5-162.

This option displays the “ATU-R Information” on page 5-

163.

This option displays the “Bit Allocation Table - Link Up

Screen” on page 5-164.

5-160 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

ADSL Status Screen

ADSL Status

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

Status \ADSL Status\

An example of the report returned from selecting the ADSL Status option is shown in

Figure 5-110

.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Shelf = Host

Line 17 ADSL Status

Link Status Up T1.413

Rate Mode Rate Adaptive

Line Type Fast

Downstream Upstream

Line Rate 8128 kbps 896 kbps

Margin 9.5 dB 7.5 dB

Power 6.1 dBm 11.9 dBm

Attenuation 0.0 dB 1.7 dB

Max Rate 10136 kbps 1044 kbps

Actual Delay 0.0 ms 0.0 ms

Relative Cap 80 % 85 %

S - Select Port N - Next Port P - Previous Port

Current Port: 17

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-110. ADSL Status Screen

61179641AL1-5C 5-161

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

ADSL Ports Status Screen

ADSL Ports Status

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

Status \ADSL Ports Status\

An example of the report returned from selecting the ALL ADSL Ports Status option is shown

in Figure 5-111

.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Shelf = Host

ADSL Ports Status

Link Rate: D/U Margin: D/U Link Rate: D/U Margin: D/U

State Mode (kbps) (dB) State Mode (kbps) (dB)

1. Down 13. Up ADSL2+ 11996/ 883 23/ 6

2. Down 14. Down

3. Down 15. Down

4. Down 16. Down

5. Down 17. Down

6. Down 18. Down

7. Down 19. Down

8. Down 20. Down

9. Down 21. Down

10. Down 22. Down

11. Down 23. Down

12. Down 24. Down

'n' for next page

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-111. All ADSL Ports Status Screen

5-162 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

ATU-R Information

ATU-R Information

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

Status \ATU-R Information\

The ATU-R Information screen (see Figure 5-112 ) provides information for the remote end of

the circuit. If the line is trained up in T1.413 mode, the screen shows a Vendor ID for the customer’s modem, and the The Provider Code is blank. If the line is trained up in G.dmt mode, the Vendor ID is blank and the Provider Code for the customer’s modem is shown. Note that this line is trained up in T1.413 mode. The next or previous port can be selected by using the N or P hot keys.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Shelf = Host

Line 17 ATU-R Information

Link Status Up T1.413

Vendor ID 34

Provider Code N/A

Version Number 1

ADSL Capabilities N/A

S - Select Port N - Next Port P - Previous Port

Current Port: 17

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-112. ATU-R Information Screen

61179641AL1-5C 5-163

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Screen

Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Screen

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \

Status \Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Screen\

The Bit Allocation Table - Link Up screen (see Figure 5-113 ) displays the bits transmitted on

each of the tones in the ADSL signal. This information can be helpful in diagnosing line noise troubles. To see the readings for more tones, press F for Forward, B for Back, N for Next ADSL

Port, and P for Previous ADSL Port.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Line 17 Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Shelf = Host

15--

-

13-- **

- ********** ******

11-- ************ *** *********** ******

B - ******************* *************** ****** i 9-- ******************* ****************** ****** t - ********************** ********************* ****** s 7-- *********************** *********************** ******

- *********************** ************************* ******

5-- *********************** ************************** ******

- *********************** ************************** ******

3-- *********************** ************************** ******

- *********************** ************************** ******

1-- *********************** ************************** ******

| | | | | | | |

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

<- B - Backward Tones F - Forward ->

Current Port: 17 N - Next P - Previous S - Select V - View T - SNR Screen

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-113. Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Screen

Press V

to change the Bit Allocation Table screen as shown in Figure 5-114 .

5-164 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Line 17 Bit Allocation Table - Link Up Shelf = Host

<- B - Backward F - Forward ->

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

------------------------------------------------------------

0| 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 8 10 10 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 12

20| 12 12 12 10 11 11 11 10 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 6

T 40| 6 7 7 8 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 o 60| 11 11 11 11 0 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 n 80| 12 11 12 11 12 11 11 12 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 2 11 11 11 11 e 100| 12 12 11 12 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 s 120| 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

140| 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

160| 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

180| 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11

200| 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11

220| 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9 9 8 7 7

240| 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

260| 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Bits per Tone

Current Port: 17 N - Next P - Previous S - Select V - View T - SNR Screen

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-114. Alternate View of the Bit Allocation Table Screen

Press T

to view the SNR Margin Table, as shown in Figure 5-115

.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Line 17 Upstream SNR Margin Table Shelf = Host

Link is Up

56--

M - *** a 48-- *********** * r - ************* *** g 40-- ******************** i - ********************** n 32-- ***********************

- *********************** i 24-- *********************** n - ***********************

16-- *********************** d - ***********************

B 8-- ***********************

- ***********************

| | | | | | | |

|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

Tones

Current Port: 17 N - Next P - Previous S - Select V - View T - BAT Screen

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-115. Upstream SNR Margin Table Screen

61179641AL1-5C 5-165

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Performance Menu

Performance Menu

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \Performance Menu\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-116

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the

Performance menu.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (configured)

3. Client 2 (configured)

4. Client 3 (configured)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-116. Select Shelf Menu

The Total Access 1248 provides displays to help analyze performance of the system. This information is available in displays of 15-minute and daily intervals.

Figure 5-117 displays the

Performance menu options.

5-166 61179641AL1-5C

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Shelf = Host

Performance

1. Display PM for Current Port

2. Clear All PM for All Ports

Selection :

Menu Descriptions

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-117. Performance Menu

An example of the ADSL Performance Monitoring Status screen is shown in

Figure 5-118 .

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

ADSL Performance Monitoring Status - ADSL Port 1 Shelf = Host

Downstream

ES LOL LOS CBC UBC

24 Hr - Current 0 12546 0 0 0

MM/DD 0 16284 0 0 0

15 Min - Current 0 850 0 0 0

16:30 0 900 0 0 0

16:15 0 900 0 0 0

16:00 0 900 0 0 0

15:45 0 900 0 0 0

15:30 0 900 0 0 0

15:15 0 900 0 0 0

15:00 0 900 0 0 0

14:45 0 900 0 0 0

B - Backward(2hrs/15min PM) F - Forward(2hrs/15min PM) T - Up/Down(Stream) P

S - Select Port P - Previous Port N - Next Port C - Clear PM Stats

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-118. Current 15 Minute Performance Screen

The Performance Monitoring Status screen fields are as shown in Table 5-115 .

61179641AL1-5C 5-167

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Field

ES

LOL

LOS

CBC

UBC

Table 5-115. Performance Monitoring Status Screen Fields

Description

This field displays the Errored Seconds.

This field displays the Loss of Link Seconds.

This field displays the Loss of Signal.

This field displays the Corrected Block Count. This is specific to interleaved mode, and indicates that an error was found and corrected.

This field displays the Uncorrected Block Count. This is specific to interleaved mode, and indicates that an error was found and could not be corrected.

The Performance Monitoring Status screen hot keys are defined in

Table 5-116 .

C

F

S

T

N

P

Table 5-116. Performance Monitoring Status Screen Hot Keys

Hot Key Description

B Backward (2hrs/15min PM)

Clear PM Status

Forward (2hrs/15min PM)

Previous Port

Next Port

Select Port

Up/Down (Stream) PM

Function

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the last 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to clear the performance monitoring statistics.

This hot key is used to display performance monitoring statistics for the next 2 hours, in 15 minute intervals.

This hot key is used to display the previous port.

This hot key is used to display the next port.

This hot key is used to select a specific port.

This hot key is used to view upstream/downstream

Performance Monitoring data.

5-168 61179641AL1-5C

ADSL DELT Menus

ADSL DELT Menus

Main Menu \

DSL Menus \ADSL DELT Menus\

NOTE

If expansion mode is enabled (refer to

“Expansion Menu” on page 5-90), the Select Shelf menu (see

Figure 5-116

) displays. A host or client unit must be chosen in order to access the

Performance menu.

Menu Descriptions

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Select Shelf

1. Host

2. Client 1 (configured)

3. Client 2 (configured)

4. Client 3 (configured)

Selection :

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-119. Select Shelf Menu

The ADSL DELT menus (see

Figure 5-120 ) facilitates the selection of a Dual-Ended Loop Test

(DELT). In a DELT diagnostic test, the near-end and far-end modems attain and exchange information about the quality of the line and connection between the units.

In addition to test configuration information, this menu also provides current test status and status information on the last test that was run.

NOTE

DELT functionality requires a service mode that supports DELT on both units.

61179641AL1-5C 5-169

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Current ADSL ServiceMode/Port Status =ADSL1 /Idle Shelf = Host

DELT Functionality requires a service mode that supports DELT on both units

ADSL DELT menus

1. Port 1

2. Activate DELT

3. Terminate Test

4. Test Data Filename: HostTest.dcf

5. DELT TFTP Address 192.168.1.105

Selection :

DELT State = Inactive DELT Status = Idle

TFTP Failure = 0

DELT Attempts = 0 DELT Completions = 0

DELT Failures = 0 DELT Timeouts = 0

Max/Last DELT time = 0.00/ 0.00

C - Clear the DELT Status

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-120. ADSL DELT Menu

The ADSL DELT menu options are shown in Table 5-117

.

Option Description

1 Port

2

3

4

5

Table 5-117. ADSL DELT Menu Options

Activate DELT

Terminate Test

Test Data Filename

DELT TFTP Address

Function

This option displays a text entry field to enter the port number on which the DELT test is to be run.

This option activates a DELT test.

This option terminates a DELT test.

This option displays a text entry field to enter a filename where the test results will be placed on test completion.

This option displays a text entry field to enter the TFTP

Address where the test results will be placed on test completion.

5-170 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

System Alarm Log Screen

System Alarm Log

Main Menu \System Alarm Log\

The Total Access 1248 system provides a system alarm log for monitoring alarms. To view the

System Alarm Log screen (see

Figure 5-121 ), select

System Alarms fro m the Main menu, and press E NTER

.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

System Alarm Log Alarms: 1 to 13 of 13 Page: 1 of 1

Date Time Level Description Status

MM/DD/YY 16:25:43 Minor T1-4: Red Alarm - LOS Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:43 Minor T1-3: Red Alarm - LOS Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:43 Minor T1-2: Red Alarm - LOS Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:43 Minor T1-1: Red Alarm - LOS Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:40 Info Download to DSP 6 completed Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:37 Info Download to DSP 5 completed Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:35 Info Download to DSP 4 completed Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:32 Info Download to DSP 3 completed Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:29 Info Download to DSP 2 completed Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:26 Info Download to DSP 1 completed Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:17 Info System Boot Active

MM/DD/YY 16:25:17 Info Alarm Log Reset Active

---------------------------->>> END OF ALARM LOG <<<----------------------------

Inverse = Active * = Unacknowledged Chronology = Descending

(N)ext (P)rev (F)irst (L)ast (C)lear (A)cknowldege (R)eset Log (T)ime Ascending

Figure 5-121. System Alarm Log Screen

The System Alarm Log screen hot keys are defined in Table 5-118 .

Hot Key Description

A Acknowledge

C

F

L

N

Clear

First

Last

Next

P Previous

R

T

Reset Log

Time Ascending

Table 5-118. System Alarm Log Hot Keys

Function

This hot key is used to acknowledge all alarms.

This hot key is used to clear all acknowledged alarms.

This hot key is used to display the first page of alarms.

This hot key is used to display the last page of alarms.

This hot key is used to display the next page of alarms.

This hot key is used to display the previous page of alarms.

This hot key is used to reset all alarms.

This hot key is used to display alarms in time ascending or descending order.

61179641AL1-5C 5-171

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

System Event Log Screen

System Event Log

Main Menu \System Event Log\

The System Event Log screen (see Figure 5-122

) provides non-volatile storage of system events.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

System Event Log Events: 1 to 14 of 250 Page: 1 of 18

# Date Time Event Description Conn User Name

1 MM/DD/YY 9:51:38 Login Craft SUPER USER

2 MM/DD/YY 9:48:33 System Started System

3 MM/DD/YY 9:48:15 System Reset TFTP

4 MM/DD/YY 9:48:09 AUC Config Complete System public

5 MM/DD/YY 9:48:04 AUC-Host S/W Complete System public

6 MM/DD/YY 9:47:00 Auto Upgrade (AUC-Host) S/W Update System public

7 MM/DD/YY 9:46:55 AUC Client1 S/W Complete System public

8 MM/DD/YY 9:45:45 Auto Upgrade (AUC-Client1) S/W Update System public

9 MM/DD/YY 9:45:40 Auto Upgrade Config (AUC) Update System public

10 MM/DD/YY 9:41:25 Login Craft SUPER USER

11 MM/DD/YY 9:36:30 Auto Logout Craft SUPER USER

12 MM/DD/YY 9:26:27 Login Craft SUPER USER

13 MM/DD/YY 9:16:03 AUC Failure (Corrupted File) System public

14 MM/DD/YY 9:16:01 Auto Upgrade Config (AUC) Update System public

---------------------------------->>> MORE <<<-----------------------------------

Event Filter = All Chronology = Descending

(N)ext (P)revious (F)irst (L)ast (V)iew (T)ime Ascending

Event Filters- (A)ll (D)ateTime Lo(G)in Acc(O)unt Securit(Y) (S)/W Updates

Figure 5-122. System Event Log Screen

The System Event Log screen hot keys are defined in Table 5-119

.

5-172 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

Hot Key Description

A All

D

F

Date/Time

First

G

L

N

O

P

Login

Last

Next

Account

Previous

S

T

V

Y

S/W Updates

Time Ascending

View

Security

Table 5-119. System Event Log Hot Keys

Function

This hot key is used to display all events.

This hot key is used to display date/time events.

This hot key is used to display the first page of events.

This hot key is used to display login events.

This hot key is used to display the last page of events.

This hot key is used to display the next page of events.l

This hot key is used to display account events.

This hot key is used to display the previous page of events.

This hot key is used to display software update events.

This hot key is used to display events in time ascending/ descending order.

This hot key is used to toggle between displaying the connection method and associated username for each event, or displaying the IP address for each event.

This hot key is used to display security events.

61179641AL1-5C 5-173

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Contact Information Screen

Contact Information

Main Menu \Contact Information\

The Contact Information screen (see

Figure 5-123 ) displays ADTRAN technical support,

repair, and online support contact information.

TID: TA1248 Total Access 1248 MM/DD/YY HH:MM

Unacknowledged Alarms: None

Contact Information

Adtran Technical Support: (800)726-8663

Adtran Repair / CAPS: (256)963-8722

Online Support: www.adtran.com

'?' - System Help Screen

Figure 5-123. Contact Information Screen

5-174 61179641AL1-5C

Menu Descriptions

TL1 Mode Screen

TL1 Mode

Main Menu \TL1 Mode\

Figure 5-124

displays the TL1 session screen. TL1 commands can be executed once the session has been activated with a proper login. All commands end with a semicolon. Type

'menus;' to return to the menu session.

/*Type 'MENUS;' to enter MENU Session*/

OK 0

<

Figure 5-124. TL1 Mode Screen

Table 5-120

lists the TL1 commands supported by the Total Access 1248 system. For further details of the TL1 commands, refer to the Total Access 11xx and 12xx ADSL2+ DSLAM TL1

Command Reference Guide (P/N 61179611L1-35).

61179641AL1-5C 5-175

ACT-PROFILE-ADSL

ACT-USER

ALW-MSG-ADSL

ALW-MSG-T1

ALW-MSG-EQPT

ALW-MSG-ENV

ALW-MSG-ALL

CANC-USER

DLT-ADSL

DLT-CRS-VC

DLT-PROFILE-ADSL

DLT-PROFILE-TRAFDSC

DLT-VCL

DNLD-SFWR-IM

ED-ADSL

ED-PROFILE-ADSLDN

ED-PROFILE-ADSLUP

ED-PROV-TFTP

ED-SECU-USER

ED-T1

ENT-ADSL

ENT-CRS-VC

ENT-IPPORT

ENT-PROFILE-ADSL

ENT-PROFILE-TRAFDSC

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 5-120. TL1 Commands

ENT-T1

ENT-VCL

TL1 Commands

GET-SYS-INFO

INH-MSG-ADSL

INH-MSG-T1

INH-MSG-EQPT

INH-MSG-ENV

INH-MSG-ALL

INIT-SYS

LOGOFF

REPT-OPSTAT-ADSLDN

REPT-OPSTAT-ADSLCOM

REPT-OPSTAT-ADSLUP

RSTR-PROV-IM

RTRV-ADSL

RTRV-ALM-ADSL

RTRV-ALM-T1

RTRV-ALM-EQPT

RTRV-ALM-ENV

RTRV-ALM-ALL

RTRV-ATTR-ADSL

RTRV-COND-ADSL

RTRV-COND-T1

RTRV-COND-EQPT

RTRV-CRS-VC

RTRV-EQPT

RTRV-HDR

RTRV-INV-EQPT

RTRV-IPPORT

RTRV-NE-ALL

RTRV-PM-T1

RTRV-PROFILE-ADSL

RTRV-PROFILE-ADSLDN

RTRV-PROFILE-ADSLUP

RTRV-PROFILE-ATMACC

RTRV-PROFILE-CAC

RTRV-PROFILE-TRAFDSC

RTRV-PROV-TFTP

RTRV-SECU-CMD

RTRV-T1

RTRV-VCL

SET-ATTR-ADSL

SET-DAT

SET-NE-ALL

SET-SID

STA-CMDSSN

STP-CMDSSN

STR-PROV-IM

RTRV-COND-ALL

5-176 61179641AL1-5C

Section 6

Maintenance

INTRODUCTION

The Total Access 1248 does not require routine maintenance for normal operation.

ADTRAN does not recommend that repairs be attempted in the field. Repair services can be obtained by returning the defective unit to ADTRAN. For more troubleshooting information, refer to the Total Access 1100/1200 Series Troubleshooting Guide (P/N 61179741L1-44). For

warranty information, refer to “Appendix A, Warranty”

.

Fan Modules

Four fans are installed in the Total Access 1248 in a removable module to maintain the hardware within proper operating temperature tolerances. With the exception of the filter, the fan module is not field serviceable. The fan module (P/N 1179675L1) is field replaceable and is

available from ADTRAN. Figure 6-1 illustrates the fan module with the filter installed.

FAN MODU

11796

75L1

LE

61179641AL1-5C

Figure 6-1. Fan Module with Filter

6-1

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

To remove a fan module, perform the following steps:

1. Loosen the screw that holds the fan module in place.

2. Remove the fan module by pulling it straight out of the chassis.

To install a new fan module, perform the following steps:

1. Insert the new fan module by pushing it straight into the chassis.

2. Tighten the screw that holds the fan module in place.

Fan Filters

The Total Access 1248 Expansion DSLAM fan module comes with a single fan filter. The filter is designed to remove particles from the air before it is pushed through the system.

Replacement filters are available from ADTRAN. This filter should be inspected at least every

90 days and replaced as necessary.

To replace a filter, remove the fan module, remove the old filter material and tuck the new filter in, ensuring that the edges of the filter are behind the metal tabs provided to hold the

filter (see Figure 6-1

).

SNMP/TFTP AND TL1 CONFIGURATION STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL

Use the following SNMP/TFTP and TL1 commands to store or retrieve the Total Access 1248

System Configuration Archive (SCA) file.

NOTE

In some installations, the configuration file can be stored and retrieved in one operation for multiple Total Access 1248 systems.

This is accomplished by incorporating the SNMP/TFTP or TL1 commands into scripts.

SNMP / TFTP

These objects are located in the ADTRAN-TA1200Shelf-MIB.mib, under adTA1200ShelfProv.

Save

Set TFTP Server IP address with adTA1200SCATftpServerHostName

Set filename using adTA1200SCAFileName

Initiate transfer using adTA1200SCAInitiateSave (option initiate (1))

Restore

Set TFTP Server IP address with adTA1200SCATftpServerHostName

Set filename using adTA1200SCAFileName

Initiate transfer using adTA1200SCAInitiateRestore (option initiate (1))

6-2 61179641AL1-5C

SNMP/TFTP and TL1 Configuration Storage and Retrieval

TL1

When accessing the Total Access 1248 via TL1, the Save and Restore commands are used to save or retrieve the SCA file.

Save

Use:

ED-PROV-TFTP:::::FILENAME=<filename>,TFTPIPADDR=<ip_addr>,SET;

Restore

Use:

ED-PROV-TFTP:::::FILENAME=<filename>,TFTPIPADDR=<ip_addr>,GET;

NOTE

TL1 commands are also executable from the Total Access 1248

Main Menu. For more information, refer to

“TL1 Mode Screen” on page 5-175.

61179641AL1-5C 6-3

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

This page is intentionally blank.

6-4 61179641AL1-5C

Section 7

Specifications

INTRODUCTION

Specifications for the Total Access 1248 are detailed in

Table 7-1 .

Table 7-1. Total Access 1248 Specifications

Specifications Descriptions

ADSL Loop Interface

Modulation Type:

Mode:

Standards:

Number of Pairs (ADSL + POTS):

Downstream Data Rate:

Upstream Data Rate:

ADSL Service Range:

Discrete Multi-Tone (DMT)

Full Duplex, Non-overlapped

T1.413; G.992.1 Annex A; G.992.2 Annex A,

G.992.3, G.992.4, G.992.5

48 (one per loop)

ADSL: 32 to 8160 kbps in 32 kbps increments

ADSL2+: 32 to 32736 kbps in 32 kbps increments

ADSL: 32 to 1024 kbps in 32 kbps increments

ADSL2+: 32 to 2048 kbps in 32 kbps increments

18 kft.

Power

Total Power:

Operating Voltage Range:

Nominal Operating Voltage:

Current Draw:

75 watts

–42 VDC to –54 VDC

–48 VDC

1.162 amps @ 54.72 VDC (see Note: below)

Tests

Diagnostics: Self Test

Dual Ended Loop Test (DELT)

Physical

Dimensions:

Weight:

Height: 1.75 inches

Width: 17.25 inches

Depth: 11.125 inches

10 pounds (aprox.)

61179641AL1-5C 7-1

Total Access 1248 Quad T1 IMA 48-Port DSLAM with Modem Installation and Maintenance Practice

Table 7-1. Total Access 1248 Specifications (Continued)

Specifications Descriptions

Environment

Temperature:

Humidity:

Operating (Standard): –40°C to +70°C

Storage: –40°C to +85°C

95% non-condensing

Part Numbers

Total Access 1248 48-Port Quad T1 IMA DSLAM with Internal Modem:

Replacement Fan:

Replacement Filter:

Replacement Filter Pack (Quantity 20):

Expansion Unit:

1179641AL1

1179675L1

1179676L1

1179676L2

1179641L5

Note: Current draw calculated with 8 kft copper line and maximum data rate of 8160 kbps in G.DMT mode with four cooling fans active (0.021 amps/fan). Current draw will vary with operational circumstances, being subject to changes in distance, data rate, data mode, and cooling requirements.

7-2 61179641AL1-5C

Appendix A

Warranty

WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SERVICE

ADTRAN will replace or repair this product within the warranty period if it does not meet its published specifications or fails while in service. Warranty information can be found at www.adtran.com/warranty .

Refer to the following subsections for sales, support, Customer and Product Service (CAPS) requests, or further information.

ADTRAN Sales

Pricing/Availability:

800-827-0807

ADTRAN Technical Support

Pre-Sales Applications/Post-Sales Technical Assistance:

800-726-8663

Standard hours: Monday - Friday, 7 a.m. - 7 p.m. CST

Emergency hours: 7 days/week, 24 hours/day

ADTRAN Repair/CAPS

Return for Repair/Upgrade:

(256) 963-8722

Repair and Return Address

Contact CAPS prior to returning equipment to ADTRAN.

ADTRAN, Inc.

CAPS Department

901 Explorer Boulevard

Huntsville, Alabama 35806-2807

61179641AL1-5C A-1

®

Carrier Networks Division

901 Explorer Blvd.

Huntsville, AL 35806

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents